Western Star 5700 Driver`s Manual

Western Star 5700 Driver`s Manual
®
WESTERN STAR 5700
Driver’s Manual
STI-499-6
A24-01858-000
Foreword
Introduction
This manual provides information needed to operate
and understand the vehicle and its components.
More detailed information is contained in the Owner’s
Warranty Information for North America booklet and
in the vehicle’s workshop and maintenance manuals.
Custom-built Western Star vehicles are equipped
with various chassis and cab components. Not all of
the information contained in this manual applies to
every vehicle. For details about components in your
vehicle, refer to the chassis specification pages included in all new vehicles and to the vehicle specification decal located inside the vehicle.
For your reference, keep this manual in the vehicle
at all times.
IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in
this manual were in effect at the time of printing.
Western Star Trucks reserves the right to discontinue models and to change specifications or
design at any time without notice and without
incurring obligation. Descriptions and specifications contained in this publication provide no
warranty, expressed or implied, and are subject
to revisions and editions without notice.
Environmental Concerns and
Recommendations
Whenever you see instructions in this manual to discard materials, you should first attempt to reclaim
and recycle them. To preserve our environment, follow appropriate environmental rules and regulations
when disposing of materials.
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices
that record specific vehicle data. The type and
amount of data recorded varies depending on how
the vehicle is equipped (such as the brand of engine,
if an air bag is installed, or if the vehicle features a
collision avoidance system, etc.).
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record
data in certain crash or near-crash situations, such
as air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for approximately 60 seconds. This data can help provide
a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. Data recorded includes
the following items:
• how various systems in the vehicle were oper-
ating
• engine system information
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator
• if the driver was depressing the brake pedal
• how fast the vehicle was traveling
NOTE: Data is not recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions. Personal data such
as name, gender, age, and crash location are
not recorded. However, other parties such as
law enforcement could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties that have the special equipment, such as law
enforcement, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
Compliance
This vehicle must be regularly inspected and maintained as indicated in the Western Star Maintenance
Manual, and in the Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections
and Maintenance chapter in this manual, in order to
continue satisfactory performance and ensure coverage of the vehicle under the manufacturer’s warranty.
Many maintenance procedures ensure that the vehicle and engine continue to comply with applicable
emissions standards. Maintenance procedures, using
components engineered to comply with greenhouse
gas emissions and fuel efficiency regulations, may be
performed by an authorized Daimler Trucks North
America dealer, an independent outlet, or the vehicle
owner or operator.
The vehicle owner is responsible for determining the
suitability of replacement components to maintain
STI-499-6 (8/15)
A24-01858-000
Printed in U.S.A.
Foreword
compliance with federal and local jurisdictional regulations. Components including, but not limited to,
tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings,
bumper, hood, vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduction timers are specifically designed and manufactured to exacting standards for regulatory fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions compliance. It
is important that these components are always replaced with components that meet or exceed the performance of the originally installed components.
Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit
the Road Safety website at: www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
Customer Assistance Center
Having trouble finding service? For over-the-road
breakdown assistance, customer concerns, literature
requests, and the location of the nearest dealer, call
1-866-850-STAR (7827). Call night or day, weekdays
or weekends. Our people are knowledgeable, professional, and committed to following through to help
you keep your truck moving.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Western Star Trucks.
If the NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Western Star Trucks.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE, Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from www.safercar.gov.
Canadian customers who wish to report a safetyrelated defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport
Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD,
© 2015 Daimler Trucks North America LLC. All rights reserved. Daimler Trucks North America LLC is a Daimler company.
No part of this publication, in whole or part, may be translated, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Daimler Trucks North America LLC. For additional information, please contact Daimler Trucks North
America LLC, Service Systems and Documentation, P.O. Box 3849, Portland OR 97208–3849 U.S.A. or refer to
www.Daimler-TrucksNorthAmerica.com and www.WesternStarTrucks.com.
Contents
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Page
Introduction, Environmental Concerns and Recommendations,
Event Data Recorder, Emissions and Fuel Efficiency Compliance,
Customer Assistance Center, Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Vehicle Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Driver Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Driver Assistance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Cab and Sleeper Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Optional Engine Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Brake Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Manual Transmissions and Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Drive Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Vehicle Appearance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
In An Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component GWR Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.2
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label
NOTE: Labels shown in this chapter are examples only. Actual specifications may vary from
vehicle to vehicle.
1
The component information label lists the vehicle
model, identification number, and major component
models. It also lists the major assemblies and installations shown on the chassis specification sheet.
One copy of the component information label is attached to the inside of the glove box; another copy is
inside the rear cover of the Owner’s Warranty Information for North America booklet. An illustration of
the label is shown in Fig. 1.1.
2
01/30/2015
f080186
1. Certification Label
2. Noise Emission Label
Fig. 1.3, Label Locations
06/28/2011
f080173
Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Labels
NOTE: Due to the variety of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) certification requirements, not all of the labels shown will apply
to your vehicle.
Tractors with or without fifth wheels purchased in the
U.S. are marked as certified by means of an FMVSS
certification label. See Fig. 1.2. This label is attached
to the driver-side B-pillar, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
The tire and rim portion of the FMVSS certification
label certifies suitable tire and rim combinations that
can be installed on the vehicle, for the given gross
axle weight rating. Tires and rims installed on the
vehicle at the time of manufacture may have a higher
load capacity than that certified by the tire and rim
label. If the tires and rims currently on the vehicle
have a lower load capacity than that shown on the
tire and rim label, then the tires and rims determine
the load limitations on each of the axles.
Trucks built without a cargo body that are intended
for service in the U.S. have an incomplete vehicle
certification label attached by the final-stage manufacturer. See Fig. 1.4. This label will be attached to
06/28/2011
f080175
Fig. 1.2, Vehicle Certification Label
1.1
Vehicle Identification
06/28/2011
f080174
Fig. 1.4, Incomplete Vehicle Certification Label
the incomplete vehicle document included with the
vehicle, and certifies that the vehicle conforms to all
applicable FMVSS regulations in effect on the date of
completion.
Emissions Labels
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Labels
Engines and vehicles manufactured after December
31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada are
required to meet all EPA regulations effective as of
the vehicle build date, and are equipped with an
emission aftertreatment system (ATS). Vehicles domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may not
have aftertreatment equipment, depending upon local
statutory emissions guidelines. See Table 1.1.
In Canada, tractors with fifth wheels are marked as
certified by means of a statement of compliance label
with the Canadian National Safety Mark attached to
the driver-side door frame B-pillar. See Fig. 1.5.
Trucks built without a cargo body and tractors built
without a fifth wheel that are intended for service in
Canada have an incomplete vehicle certification label
(similar to Fig. 1.4) attached to the driver-side
B-pillar. After completion of the vehicle, a complete
certification label must be attached by the final-stage
manufacturer to certify that the vehicle conforms to
all applicable Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(CMVSS) regulations in effect on the date of
completion.
Aftertreatment System Indicators
Label
A warning label on the driver-side visor contains important warning indicators in the instrument cluster
that pertain to the ATS. See Fig. 1.7.
It is a violation of U.S. federal law to alter exhaust
plumbing, ATS, or other components in any way that
would bring the engine/vehicle out of compliance with
certification requirements [Ref: 42 U.S.C. S7522(a)
(3)]. It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the
vehicle so that it conforms to EPA regulations.
EPA Noise Emission Control Label
A vehicle noise emission control label (Fig. 1.8) is
located on the driver-side B-pillar as shown in
Fig. 1.3. It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle so that it conforms to EPA regulations.
10/10/2006
f080024
Fig. 1.5, Canadian National Safety Mark
Component GWR Label
The component GWR label is located on the A-pillar
of the driver-side door frame. The label provides
maximum GWR ratings for each component.
IMPORTANT: Certain Western Star incomplete
vehicles may be produced with incomplete noise
control hardware. Such vehicles will not have a
vehicle noise emission control information label.
For such vehicles, it is the final-stage manufacturer’s responsibility to complete the vehicle in
conformity to U.S. EPA regulations (40 CFR Part
205) and label it for compliance.
See Fig. 1.6 for a typical component GWR label.
1.2
Vehicle Identification
06/28/2011
f080172
Fig. 1.6, Component GWR Label
Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations
Build Date
Regulation: Emissions Components
EPA10 (reduce NOx emissions to 0.2 g/bhp-hr): Aftertreatment device (ATD)
January 1, 2010–December 31,
containing a diesel particulate filter that traps soot and ash, with selective catalyst
2012
reduction (SCR) technology that utilizes diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) to convert NOx to
nitrogen and water vapor.
GHG14: Aerodynamic and fuel efficiency components including, but not limited to,
tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings, bumper, hood, vehicle speed
From March 5, 2012
limiters, and idle reduction timers specifically designed to meet regulatory fuel
efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions standards.
Table 1.1, Applicable Emissions System Based on Build Date and EPA Regulations
Vehicle Emission Control Information
Label
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional
requirements as specified by federal greenhouse gas
and fuel efficiency regulations (GHG14). These vehicles are equipped with components that increase
fuel efficiency and reduce GHG emissions. Components may include, but are not limited to, low rolling
resistance tires; aerodynamic devices such as hood,
cab side extenders, and fuel tank fairings; vehicle
speed limiters; and idle shutdown timers.
A Vehicle Emission Control Information Label is located on the driver-side door. See Fig. 1.9. It is the
owner’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle so that
it conforms to EPA and NHTSA regulations.
Certified Clean Idle Label
The California Air Resources Board (CARB) requires
model year 2008 and newer heavy-duty diesel engines to be equipped with a non-programmable engine shutdown system that automatically shuts down
the engine after five minutes of idling in order to limit
emissions of particulate matter and NOx.
1.3
Certified vehicles are equipped with a label placed
near the bottom edge of the driver-side door. See
Fig. 1.10.
Vehicle Identification
IMPORTANT
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
regeneration is needed.
If flashing, regenerate as soon as
possible. Engine derate possible.
DPF Regen Needed
Hot exhaust can cause fire.
Hot Exhaust
Keep flammables and people away
from exhaust.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) level is
low. Engine derate likely.
Refill tank with certified DEF.
DEF Refill Needed
DEF
See operator’s manual for complete instructions.
24−01656−000
11/30/2010
f080162
Fig. 1.7, ATS Indicators
06/28/2011
CERTIFIED
CLEAN IDLE
f080171
Fig. 1.8, Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label
MANUFACTURED BY:
VIN:
VEH FAMILY CD:
GVWR−KG
GVWR−LBS
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
REGULATORY CLASS:
EMISSION CONTROL IDENTIFIERS:
THIS VEHICLE COMPLIES WITH U. S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR XXXX HEAVY DUTY VEHICLES.
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR PROPER MAINTENANCE OF THIS VEHICLE.
U PART NO. 24−01177−060 REV A
03/06/2012
f080184
Fig. 1.9, Vehicle Emission Control Information Label
02/20/2012
f080179
Fig. 1.10, CARB Clean Idle Label
1.4
2
Vehicle Access
Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grab Handles and Access Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
2.1
2.3
2.4
Vehicle Access
Door Locks and Handles
2
To unlock either door from outside the cab, insert the
key in the lock and turn it one-quarter turn towards
the front of the vehicle. See Fig. 2.1. Turn the key
back to the original position to remove it. Pull out on
the paddle latch to open the door.
1
1
2
f720394a
10/20/2014
1. Lock
2. Paddle Latch
Fig. 2.1, Exterior Door Handle
To lock either door from outside the cab, insert the
key in the lock and turn it one-quarter turn towards
the rear of the vehicle. Turn the key back to the original position to remove it. If the door is closed, it will
now be locked. If the door is open, close the door
firmly.
To lock either door from inside the cab, push the lock
button down. Pull the lock button up to unlock the
door from the inside.
To open either door from inside the cab, pull the lock
button up, then pull the interior door latch out and
push the door outwards.
Remote Keyless Entry
Remote keyless entry is optional on Western Star
vehicles. The remote entry key fob can be used to
unlock the doors from outside the cab.
To unlock both doors, press the unlock button. To
lock both doors, press the lock button. See Fig. 2.2.
2.1
11/02/2011
1. Unlock Button
f545852
2. Lock Button
Fig. 2.2, Key Fob
Key Fob Programming
A maximum of four fobs can be programmed to work
on one vehicle. Whenever a new fob will be used, all
existing fobs must be reprogrammed at the same
time. Any existing fobs that were previously programmed will no longer work on the vehicle unless
they are all reprogrammed at the same time.
To have the key fobs programmed, take the vehicle
to an authorized Western Star dealer or service facility.
Grab Handles and Access
Steps
The grab handles, access steps, and steering wheel
are all part of the cab access system. Use these
"helping hands" when getting into or out of the cab.
They will increase your security and comfort.
Vehicle Access
CAUTION
Slipping or falling from the vehicle can result in
personal injury or propert damage.
Wet or dirty shoes greatly increase the chance of
slipping or falling. If your shoes are wet or dirty,
be especially careful when entering or exiting the
vehicle.
2
Always maintain three-point contact with the vehicle when entering or exiting the cab. Threepoint contact means both feet and one hand, or
both hands and one foot.
3
4
When steps are mounted on battery box covers,
make sure that the cover is latched and secure
before using the steps.
Do not step on the fuel tank, battery box, frame,
etc. unless adequate slip resistant surfaces and
handholds are provided.
Do not jump from the vehicle.
For ease of entry and exit, there are multiple grab
handles: a handle on the A-pillar (optional on the
driver’s side), handles on the inside of the door, and
handles on the B-pillar. In addition, the steering
wheel may be used to provide a secure handhold.
There are at least two access steps to provide secure footholds.
Entering the Driver’s Side
1.
Open the driver-side door and place anything
that you are carrying in the cab.
2.
Grasp the B-pillar grab handle with your right
hand. See Fig. 2.3.
3.
Grasp the lower door pocket with your left hand.
4.
Place your right foot on the bottom step, and pull
yourself up.
5.
Place your left foot on the top step.
6.
Grasp the steering wheel or A-pillar grab handle,
if equipped, with your left hand.
7.
Step into the cab with your right foot first, and
grasp the steering wheel with your right hand.
5
1
10/20/2014
1. Lower Door Pocket
2. Upper Door Pocket
3. Door Latch
f720729a
4. Steering Wheel
5. B-Pillar Grab Handle
Fig. 2.3, Driver-Side Cab Access
Exiting the Driver’s Side
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
while carrying any items in your hands. Place
them in an accessible location on the seat or
cab floor and make sure they will not get in your
way as you exit, then retrieve them after you
have exited the cab.
CAUTION
Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not attempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to
slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting
in this way, there is a greater likelihood of personal injury.
2.2
Vehicle Access
1.
Grasp the steering wheel with both hands, place
your left foot on the top step, and stand on the
threshold, facing into the cab.
2.
Grasp the B-pillar grab handle with your right
hand. See Fig. 2.3, item 5.
3.
Move your right foot to the bottom step.
4.
Move your left hand to the lower door pocket.
5.
Step to the ground with your left foot first.
3.
Grasp the lower door pocket with your right
hand.
4.
Place your left foot on the bottom step.
5.
Place your right foot on the top step and move
your right hand to the A-pillar grab handle.
6.
Place your left foot on the top step, then move
your left hand to the A-pillar grab handle.
7.
Step into the cab with your left foot first.
Entering the Passenger’s Side
Exiting the Passenger’s Side
1.
Open the passenger-side door and place anything that you are carrying in the cab.
2.
Grasp the B-pillar grab handle with your left
hand. See Fig. 2.4.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
while carrying any items in your hands. Place
them in an accessible location on the seat or
cab floor and make sure they will not get in your
way as you exit, then retrieve them after you
have exited the cab.
CAUTION
Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not attempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to
slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting
in this way, there is a greater likelihood of personal injury.
4
3
2
1
1.
Grasp the A-pillar grab handle with both hands,
then place your right foot on the top step while
facing inward. See Fig. 2.4.
2.
Place your left foot on the top step.
3.
Move your left hand to the B-pillar grab handle.
4.
Move your right foot to the bottom step.
5.
Move your right hand to the lower door pocket.
6.
Step to the ground with your left foot first.
Back-of-Cab Access
10/20/2014
5
1. B-Pillar Grab Handle
2. Door Latch
3. A-Pillar Grab Handle
f720728a
4. Upper Door Pocket
5. Lower Door Pocket
Fig. 2.4, Passenger-Side Cab Access
2.3
When trailer air and electrical connections cannot be
reached conveniently from the ground, Federal Motor
Carrier Safety Regulations require that tractors have
adequate back-of-cab access. Grab handles are typically located on the backwall of the cab or sleeper, or
on the inside of the cab extender, if equipped. A grab
handle may also be provided on the exhaust stack.
Steps may be mounted on the fuel tank(s), battery or
tool box(es), or on metal brackets secured to the
Vehicle Access
1.
Facing the deck plate, grasp the grab handle
with both hands. Reach up as far as is comfortable.
2.
Place one foot on the bottom step and pull yourself up.
Follow these rules for back-of-cab access. Failing
to follow these rules could lead to a fall, and possible personal injury.
3.
Place your other foot on the top step.
4.
Move your lower hand to a higher position on the
grab handle.
Never step on any exterior part unless it has a
slip-resistant surface meant for safe stepping. If
the surface is movable, such as a battery box
cover with a slip-resistant surface, be certain it is
firmly secured.
5.
Step onto the deck plate.
frame rail. A deck plate is mounted across the top of
the frame rails. All other areas are not meant to support back-of-cab access
CAUTION
Be careful not to trip on items such as chains or
air lines in the back-of-cab area.
Always follow safety procedures for back-of-cab
access, maintaining three-point contact—both
hands and one foot, or both feet and one hand—
whenever moving around, and always face in toward the deck plate when climbing up or down.
Wet or dirty shoes, steps, or grab rails greatly
increase the chance of slipping or falling. If your
shoes or the contact areas are wet or dirty, clean
and dry them as much as possible before accessing the back of cab area, and be especially
careful when climbing or standing on the vehicle.
Never jump onto, or off of, a vehicle; doing so
creates a very high likelihood of a fall and personal injury.
Exiting Back-of-Cab Area
1.
Face the center of the vehicle and grasp the
sidewall grab handle with both hands.
2.
Place one foot at a time on the top step.
3.
Move your upper hand to a lower position on the
grab handle.
4.
Move one foot to the bottom step.
5.
Step to the ground with your upper foot first.
Hood Opening and Closing
The hood can be raised to a full-open position. Tiltassist struts help you to raise the hood, and to lower
it to the operating position. In the operating position,
the hood is secured to the cab-mounted cowl by a
hold-down latch on each side.
Opening the Hood
IMPORTANT: Climb onto, and down from, behind the cab while facing in toward the vehicle,
as you would on a ladder. Do not climb up or
down facing out away from the vehicle.
1.
Release both hood hold-down latches by pulling
the handles outward.
2.
Slowly tilt the hood with both hands on the grab
handle.
Accessing Back-of-Cab Area
3.
As the hood starts to open, walk backwards as
you pull. The hood will stop in the full-open
position.
WARNING
External surfaces of the exhaust system remain
hot after the engine has been shut down. When
accessing the back of the cab or sleeper, do not
touch any part of the exhaust system other than
the exhaust-mounted grab handle, if equipped, or
severe burns could occur.
Closing the Hood
1.
Grasp and lift the grab handle to tilt the hood
toward the closed position.
2.
As the hood goes over center, slowly lower the
hood with both hands on the grab handle.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that both latches are
fully engaged before operating the vehicle.
2.4
Vehicle Access
3.
2.5
Make sure the hood is flush with the cowl, then
secure the hood by engaging both hood holddown latches.
3
Instruments
Instrumentation Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Driver Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Overhead Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Instruments
• "Driver Message Center"
Instrumentation Control Units
The instrumentation control unit (ICU) provides the
driver with engine and vehicle information. It is comprised of standard and optional gauges, an audible
warning, a driver message center, and a lightbar containing warning and indicator lamps (also known as
telltales). Warning and indicator lamps illuminate in
red (danger), amber (caution), green (status advisory), or blue (high-beam headlights active).
Ignition Sequence
Western Star 5700 vehicles are equipped with an
ICU4Me. See Fig. 3.1 for a typical ICU layout.
NOTE: Primary and secondary air pressure
gauges are the only air gauges that complete a
sweep of their dials during the ignition sequence.
The following headings in this chapter provide additional information and operating instructions for ICU
components:
When the ignition is turned on, the ICU runs a selfcheck. See Fig. 3.2. Observing the ignition sequence
is a good way to ensure the ICU is functioning properly.
IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
ICU self-check is complete.
When the ignition is turned on, the following actions
should occur:
• "Warning and Indicator Lights"
• "Instruments"
15
14
5
13
7
1
6
8
4
9
12
10
11
2
3
12/11/2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
f611244
Voltmeter
Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge
Trailer Air Supply Gauge
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge
Tachometer and Coolant Temperature Gauge
Fuel/DEF Level Gauge
Speedometer and Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Suspension Air Pressure Gauge
Forward Drive-Axle Temperature Gauge
Rear Drive-Axle Temperature Gauge
Trailer Suspension Air Pressure Gauge
Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
Primary Air Pressure Gauge
Driver Message Center
Fig. 3.1, ICU4Me Instrument Cluster
3.1
Instruments
• electronic gauges complete a full sweep of
IGNITION SWITCH
TURNED TO ON
their dials
• warning and indicator lamps illuminate, then
are extinguished
• audible alert sounds for approximately four
seconds or until sufficient air pressure builds
up in the primary and secondary air systems
ICU PERFORMS
SELF−TEST
• DEF level indicator illuminates all segments
green, then turns them off one at a time before
turning the leftmost segment amber and then
red
IF NO FAULTS
WERE DETECTED
123456.7
• Western Star logo displays on the ICU4Me
on the driver message center, followed by any
active faults
IMPORTANT: If any red or amber warning and
indicator lamps do not illuminate during the ICU
self-check or do not go out after the self-check
completes, take the action outlined in Table 3.1,
then take the vehicle to an authorized Western
Star service facility as soon as possible.
NOTE: If active faults are present, take the vehicle to an authorized Western Star service facility as soon as possible.
If the ICU receives active fault codes, it displays
them one after the other until the parking brake is
released or the ignition is turned off. Once the parking brake is completely released, the ICU displays
the home screen. If there are no active faults, the
ICU displays the home screen after the self-check
completes.
Audible Alerts
An audible alert sounds during the ignition sequence
and whenever one of the following conditions exists:
• Engine oil pressure falls below the minimum
preset value.
• Coolant temperature rises above the maximum
preset value.
• Air pressure falls below approximately 70 psi
(483 kPa).
• Parking brake is set with the vehicle moving
APU 190
MI
12.3 VOLTS
driver message center for two seconds.
• software revision level of the ICU is displayed
IF FAULT DETECTED
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASED
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASED
123456.7
MI
12.3 VOLTS
01/18/2012
f040420c
Fig. 3.2, ICU Ignition Sequence
• System voltage falls below 11.9 volts.
• Door is open or the headlights are on, with the
parking brake off.
• Driver seat belt is not fastened with the parking
brake off (optional).
• Outside temperature falls below 35°F (1.7°C)
(optional).
Warning and Indicator Lights
The ICU has three or four rows of warning and indicator lights with icon symbols, depending on the ICU
configuration. The positions of the lights may vary,
but the telltales are standard for all applications. See
Table 3.1 for a listing of standard and commonly
used warning and indicator lamps.
Warning and indicator lamps illuminate in red (danger), amber (caution), green (status advisory), or
blue (high-beam headlights active).
IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdictional emissions guidelines, vehicles and/or engines that are domiciled outside of the U.S. and
Canada may not be compliant with EPA07,
EPA10, or GHG14 regulations. Noncompliant
faster than two miles per hour.
3.2
Instruments
vehicles may not be equipped with all of the
lamps shown in Table 3.1.
Common Warning and Indicator Lamps
Lamp Description
Indicates a serious fault that requires engine shutdown
immediately. The engine protection system will reduce the
maximum engine torque and speed, and, if the condition
does not improve, will shut down the engine within 30 to 60
seconds.
STOP
BRAKE
P
PARK
3.3
STOP Engine*
Safely bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road
and shut down the engine as soon as the red light is seen.
If the engine shuts down while the vehicle is in a
hazardous location, turn the key to the OFF position for
a few seconds, then restart the engine and move the
vehicle to a safer location.
Color
Red
High Coolant Temperature
Indicates the coolant temperature is above the maximum
allowable temperature.
Red
Low Air Pressure (EPA10
and Newer)
Indicates air pressure in the primary or secondary reservoir
has dropped below approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
Red
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Indicates the engine oil pressure is below the minimum
allowable pressure.
Red
Transmission Overheat
Indicates high transmission temperature.
Red
Transmission Fluid Level
Indicates low transmission fluid level. Safely bring the
vehicle to a stop as soon as possible.
Red
Parking Brake (EPA10
and Newer)
Indicates the parking brake is engaged.
Red
Low Battery Voltage
Indicates that battery voltage is 11.9 volts or less.
Red
Unfastened Seat Belt
Activates with an audible alert when the system detects that
the parking brake is off and the driver seat belt is not
fastened on some vehicles. On other vehicles, this lamp
illuminates for 15 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on.
Red
Check ECAS
Indicates Electronically Controlled Air Suspension (ECAS)
active fault.
Red
Instruments
CHECK
CHECK Engine*
Common Warning and Indicator Lamps
Lamp Description
Indicates an engine condition (low oil pressure, low coolant
level, high coolant temperature, high DPF soot level, or
uncontrolled DPF regeneration) that requires correction.
Correct the condition as soon as possible. If the condition
worsens, the STOP engine lamp will illuminate.
Slow (10-second) flashing indicates a regeneration (regen)
is in progress.
High Exhaust System
Temperature (HEST)*
IMPORTANT: When the HEST lamp is illuminated, do
not park the vehicle near flammable material.
Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) Status
Solid illumination indicates high exhaust temperatures at the
outlet of the tail pipe when speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
Solid illumination indicates a regen is required. Change to a
more challenging duty cycle (such as highway driving ) to
raise exhaust temperatures for at least twenty minutes, or
perform a parked regen.
Color
Amber
Amber
Amber
Blinking indicates that a parked regen is required
immediately. An engine derate and shutdown will occur.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Indicates an emissions-related fault. See the engine
operation manual for details.
Amber
Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle ABS is
engaged.
NO
CHARGE
Vehicle ABS
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the vehicle ABS.
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer ABS is engaged.
Amber
Trailer ABS
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the trailer ABS.
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
Amber
No Charge
Indicates the alternator is not properly powering the
electrical system.
Amber
Water in Fuel
Indicates the fuel may contain water. Drain any water
collected in the fuel/water separators.
Amber
Fuel Filter Restriction
Indicates the fuel filter is clogged and requires service.
Amber
Check Transmission
Indicates an undesirable transmission condition.
Amber
3.4
Instruments
Common Warning and Indicator Lamps
Lamp Description
Indicates that the system is preventing the starter from
cranking. This can occur when the ignition switch is turned
to START before the gauge sweep has completed.
START
BLOCKED
Start Blocked (GHG14)
NOTE: Illumination of the Start Blocked lamp does not
indicate a problem with the starter.
Color
Amber
Turn the ignition switch back to ON, wait for the lamp to go
out, then turn the ignition switch to START again.
Flashing indicates the ATC system is active, or the ATC
button has been pressed to allow wheel slip.
WHEEL
SPIN
Wheel Spin
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the ATC system.
Repair the ATC system immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
Momentary illumination indicates that a stability event has
occurred.
Amber
Roll Stability
On vehicles that are also equipped with ATC, flashing
indicates the ATC button has been pressed to allow wheel
slip.
Amber
Hill Start Aid (HSA)
Override
Indicates the HSA switch has been pressed to override the
hill start assist feature.
Amber
Outside Normal Ride
Height
Indicates the current rear suspension height is not at the
normal ride height. This light will turn off once the vehicle
returns to normal ride height.
Amber
Engine Brake
Indicates the engine brake is enabled.
Green
Left-Turn Signal
Flashing indicates the outside left-turn signal lights are
activated.
Green
Right-Turn Signal
Flashing indicates the outside right-turn signal lights are
activated.
Green
Indicates the cruise control is enabled.
Cruise Control
NOTE: The ICU4Me does not have a green cruise control
telltale.
High-Beam Headlights
Indicates the high-beam headlights are on.
Green
Blue
* See Fig. 3.3 for an explanation of the aftertreatment system (ATS) warning indicators, and actions required to avoid further engine protection steps.
Table 3.1, Common Warning and Indicator Lamps
3.5
Instruments
gine shuts down while the vehicle is in a hazardous location, turn the key to the OFF position
for a few seconds, then restart the engine and
move the vehicle to a safer location.
Engine Protection System
WARNING
When the red STOP engine lamp illuminates,
most engines are programmed to shut down automatically within 30 seconds. The driver must
immediately move the vehicle to a safe location
at the side of the road to prevent causing a hazardous situation that could cause bodily injury,
property damage, or severe damage to the engine.
On other engines, the engine protection system will
shut down the engine. It will first derate the engine,
then shut it down completely 30 to 60 seconds after
the indicator illuminates (depending on the critical
fault type) if the condition does not improve. Bring
the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road before
the engine shuts down.
Some vehicles may have a shutdown-override
switch, which may be used to momentarily override
the shutdown sequence. See Chapter 10 for detailed
information regarding the shutdown process.
See Fig. 3.3 for an explanation of the aftertreatment
system (ATS) warning indicators, and actions required to avoid further engine protection steps.
The STOP engine lamp illuminates when the engine
protection system is activated in one of two ways. On
some engines, the engine protection system will derate the engine, allowing it to run at lower rpm and
slower vehicle speed. Drive the vehicle to a safe location or to a service facility.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop, then restart the engine.
To restart the engine, turn the ignition to OFF, leave
it there a few seconds, then turn the ignition to
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION
INDICATOR
LAMP(S)
STOP
CHECK
(Solid)
(Flashing)
Level 1
Level 2
WARNING
(Flashing)
Level 3
Level 4
Indicator Lamp
Message(s)
Filter Regeneration
Recommended.
Filter
Regeneration
Necessary
Parked Regeneration
Required − Engine
Derate
Service Regeneration Required.
Engine Derate To Idle Only.
Diesel Particulate
Filter Condition
Filter is reaching
capacity.
Filter is now
reaching maximum
capacity.
Switch.
Filter has reached
maximum capacity.
Filter has exceeded maximum
capacity.
Required Action
Bring vehicle to
highway speeds to
allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration.
To avoid engine
derate, bring vehicle
to highway speeds
to allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration, or
perform a Parked
Regeneration as
soon as possible.
Vehicle must be
parked, and a Parked
Regeneration must
be performed.
Engine will begin
derate.
Vehicle must be parked, and a
Service Regeneration must be
performed. Check engine
operator’s manual for details.
Engine will shut down.
HEST (High Exhaust
System Temperature)
Flashing
A regeneration is in
progress.
Solid
Exhaust components
and exhaust gas are at
high temperature. When
stationary, keep away
from people and
flammable materials or
vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
02/20/2009
f080156
Fig. 3.3, ATS Warning Lamps
IMPORTANT: Safely bring the vehicle to a stop
on the side of the road and shut down the engine as soon as the red light is seen. If the en-
START. The engine will run for a short period and
shut down again if the condition does not improve.
3.6
Instruments
Instruments
The instruments are listed here in alphabetical order,
to make the information easier to find.
NOTE: Some of the listed instruments are optional, and not found in every vehicle.
Air Intake Restriction Gauge
The air intake restriction gauge indicates the vacuum
on the engine side of the air cleaner. On standard
installations, it is mounted on the air intake duct in
the engine compartment, and has a go/no-go restriction indicator without graduations. See Fig. 3.4. As
an option, a graduated indicator (Fig. 3.5) on the air
intake duct or, for easier viewing, a dash-mounted
restriction gauge may be installed.
04/08/2005
Air intake restriction vacuum is measured in inches
of water (inH2O). For vehicles equipped with a
graduated indicator or a restriction gauge on the
dash, check the gauge with the engine off. If the yellow signal stays locked in the red zone once the engine is shut down, or is at or above 18 inH2O (for
Detroit engines), the air cleaner element needs to be
replaced.
NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and
cause a temporary high reading.
Application Air Pressure Gauge
An application air pressure gauge (Fig. 3.6) registers
the air pressure being used to apply the brakes, and
should be used for reference only. The gauge will not
register air pressure until the foot brake pedal is depressed or the trailer hand brake is applied.
f090431
Fig. 3.4, Manual-Reset Air Restriction Indicator, Go/
No-Go
08/07/2014
f611267
Fig. 3.6, Application Air Pressure Gauge
Coolant Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined
and corrected.
02/12/2015
f090514
Fig. 3.5, Air Intake Restriction Indicator, Graduated
3.7
During normal engine operation, the coolant temperature gauge (Fig. 3.7) should read 175 to 195°F
(79 to 91°C). If the temperature remains below 160°F
Instruments
(71°C), inspect the cooling system to determine the
cause.
• 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) for Dana Spicer®
drive axles
08/07/2014
f611268
Fig. 3.8, Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (rear drive
axle gauge shown)
07/29/2014
f611254
Fig. 3.7, Tachometer and Coolant Temperature Gauge
For Detroit engines, if coolant temperature rises
above 215°F (101°C), the CHECK engine lamp will
illuminate. If the condition does not improve, the
STOP engine lamp will also illuminate and an audible
warning will sound. The engine will then derate or
shut down, depending on the type of engine protection system installed.
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges
NOTICE
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
caused by a load increase may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, drive axle oil temperature
gauges (Fig. 3.8) should read as follows:
• 160 to 220°F (71 to 104°C) for Detroit™ and
Meritor™ drive axles
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil temperature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load decreases, there is no problem.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
NOTICE
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure
may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle
to a safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate the engine
until the cause has been determined and corrected.
The engine oil pressure gauge, as shown in Fig. 3.9,
displays the current engine oil pressure. If engine oil
pressure falls below the minimum levels shown in
Table 3.2, the CHECK engine lamp will illuminate. If
the condition does not improve, the STOP engine
lamp will also illuminate and an audible warning will
sound. The engine will then derate or shut down, depending on the type of engine protection system installed.
NOTE: Oil pressures in Table 3.2 are given with
the engine at operating temperature. With the
3.8
Instruments
engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the
engine is new to create a guide for checking
engine condition.
• 200 to 260°F (93 to 126°C) for Detroit engines
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil temperature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load decreases, there is no problem.
07/29/2014
f611251
Fig. 3.10, Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
07/29/2014
f611245
Fig. 3.9, Speedometer and Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Minimum Oil Pressure
At Idle Speed:
At Rated RPM:
Engine Model
psi (kPa)
psi (kPa)
Detroit
14 (97)
55 (350)
Table 3.2, Minimum Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
caused by a load increase may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the engine until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, the optional engine oil temperature gauge (Fig. 3.10) should read in the following temperature range:
3.9
Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Gauge
For engines that are EPA10-compliant or newer, the
fuel and DEF levels are measured in a dual purpose
fuel/DEF level gauge. See Fig. 3.11.
The diesel fuel level is indicated at the top of the
gauge, with a low-fuel warning lamp that illuminates
amber when the diesel fuel level registers 1/8th of
capacity.
The DEF level is indicated in a four-segment lightbar
on the lower portion of the gauge. There is a low
DEF level warning lamp that illuminates amber when
the DEF level reaches 10% of capacity. See Chapter 12 for details of the DEF gauge functions.
Primary and Secondary Air Pressure
Gauges
WARNING
If air pressure falls below minimum pressure, the
braking ability of the vehicle will be limited. Slow
the vehicle down and bring it to a gradual stop.
Instruments
A low-air-pressure warning light and audible alert,
connected to both the primary and secondary systems, activate when air pressure in either system
drops below approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
1
When the engine is started, the warning light and
audible warning remain on until air pressure in both
systems exceeds minimum pressure.
Speedometer
Two speedometer options are available. The U.S.
version of the speedometer (Fig. 3.9) registers speed
in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
(km/h), with mph in larger numbers. The metric version of the speedometer face reverses this arrangement, with km/h in larger numbers.
4
3
2
10/08/2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
f611246
Diesel Fuel Level Indicator
DEF Level Indicator
Low DEF Warning Lamp (amber below 10% DEF)
Low Fuel Warning Lamp (amber at 1/8 tank of fuel)
Suspension Air Pressure Gauge
A suspension air pressure gauge (Fig. 3.13) registers
the air pressure applied to the vehicle air
suspension.
Fig. 3.11, Fuel/DEF Gauge, EPA10 and Newer
Do not attempt to move the vehicle until air pressure has risen above the minimum level. Moving
a vehicle without adequate braking power could
cause an accident resulting in property damage,
personal injury, or death.
Air pressure gauges (Fig. 3.12) register the pressure
in the primary and secondary air systems. Normal
pressure, with the engine running, is 100 to 120 psi
(689 to 827 kPa) in both systems.
07/29/2014
f611252
Fig. 3.13, Suspension Air Pressure Gauge
Tachometer
The tachometer (Fig. 3.7) indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm) and serves as a guide
for shifting the transmission and keeping the engine
in the appropriate rpm range. For low idle and rated
rpm, see the engine identification plate.
07/29/2014
f611247
Fig. 3.12, Air Pressure Gauge (primary shown)
3.10
Instruments
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge
The transmission fluid temperature gauge, shown in
Fig. 3.14, measures the transmission lubricant operating temperature. Temperatures vary by application,
but the transmission fluid temperature gauge reading
should not exceed 250°F (121°C).
07/29/2014
f611249
Fig. 3.15, Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge
Voltmeter
07/29/2014
f611248
Fig. 3.14, Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
The voltmeter indicates the vehicle charging system
voltage when the engine is running and the battery
voltage when the engine is off. By monitoring the
voltmeter, the driver can stay aware of potential battery charging problems and have them fixed before
the batteries discharge enough to create starting difficulties. A digital voltage display is integrated with
driver message center. An optional voltmeter gauge
(Fig. 3.16) may be installed.
A sudden increase in transmission fluid temperature that is not caused by a load increase may
indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a
safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent
further damage. Do not operate the vehicle until
the cause has been determined and corrected.
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil temperature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load decreases, there is no problem.
Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge
A turbocharger boost pressure gauge (Fig. 3.15) indicates the pressure in the intake manifold, in excess
of atmospheric pressure, being created by the
turbocharger.
07/29/2014
f611250
Fig. 3.16, Voltmeter
The voltmeter will normally show approximately 13.7
to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The voltage
3.11
Instruments
of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts when
the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0 volts is
considered a low battery, and a completely discharged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts.
If the voltmeter shows an undercharged or overcharged condition for an extended period, have the
charging system and batteries checked at an authorized Western Star service facility.
On a vehicle equipped with a battery isolator system,
the voltmeter measures the average voltage of all the
batteries when the engine is running. When the engine is off, the voltmeter shows only the isolated battery voltage and does not indicate the voltage of the
engine-starting batteries.
Driver Message Center
ICU4Me
Functions
The driver message center is divided into four sections. The odometer and cruise control status field
are displayed along the bottom of the message center. When cruise control is active, the cruise control
status field displays relevant cruise control icons and
the set speed. If the vehicle is equipped with a
manual transmission, time and temperature are displayed in the top left corner of the driver message
center. The message field displays the driving
screens and alert messages. See Fig. 3.18.
If the vehicle is equipped with an automated transmission, the gear display is located in the top left
corner of the driver message center. Time and temperature are displayed in the message field, unless
an alert message is active or a driving screen has
been selected. The odometer and cruise control status field are displayed along the bottom of the message center. See Fig. 3.19. For information about
transmission display options, see Chapter 15.
1
ICU4Me settings and the driver message center are
controlled using the switches mounted in the lefthand switch pod of the steering wheel. See
Fig. 3.17.
2
77° F
0
5555555 mi
4
1/7
Trip MPG: 5.6
NW
15
10
5
65 mph
1
7
3
06/26/2012
5
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
2
4
3
f611166
Temperature and Compass
Message Field
Cruise Control Status Field
Odometer
Fig. 3.18, Driver Message Center Without Gear Display,
ICU4Me
12/11/2014
f611255a
NOTE: To reset values in the ICU4Me driver message
center, press and hold the RIGHT navigation switch.
1. Volume Up Switch
2. Volume Down Switch
3. Headlight Interrupt Switch
4. UP Navigation Switch
5. RIGHT Navigation Switch
6. DOWN Navigation Switch
7. LEFT Navigation Switch
Fig. 3.17, Steering Wheel-Mounted Switches, Left-Hand
Switch Pod
Alert Messages
Alert messages are displayed in the message field to
notify the driver when certain conditions occur. They
include warnings, cautions, and other messages that
require the driver’s attention. Not all alert messages
are critical to the operation of the vehicle. More important messages take priority over less important
messages.
NOTE: All alert messages follow the format
shown in Fig. 3.20.
Press the OK button on the left-hand steering wheel
pod to acknowledge alert messages and revert to the
previously displayed driving screen. The following
3.12
Instruments
1
10
5555555 mi
06/26/2012
1/7
NW
77 °F
A econ
1.
2.
3.
4.
• Enter parked menus
2
Time &
Temperature
65 mph
3
4
f611165
MPG
Information
Gear Display
Temperature and Compass
Cruise Control Status Field
Odometer
Predictive
Cruise
Control (opt)
Fig. 3.19, Driver Message Center with Gear Display,
ICU4Me
10
Trip
Information
Park Brake On!
A econ
Leg
Information
5555555 mi
06/12/2012
f611192
Fig. 3.20, Parking Brake Alert Message
alert messages will repeat intermittently until the condition is eliminated:
• turn signal on
• low voltage
• no datalink
• low transmission air pressure (Detroit transmis-
sions only)
Driving Screens
With the parking brake off, only the driving screens
are available. Use the UP and DOWN navigation
switches on the steering wheel to scroll through the
driving screens; see Fig. 3.21. To reset any values,
press and hold the RIGHT navigation switch.
12/11/2014
Parked Screens/Menus
Park the vehicle and set the parking brake to access
the parked menus and submenus. See Fig. 3.22. To
reset values in any of the menus, press and hold the
RIGHT navigation switch.
• Trip information
• Fuel information
• Engine information
• Diagnostics
• Service information
• MPG information
• ICU Information
• Gauge display (if selected)
• Predictive Cruise Control (optional)
f040823b
Fig. 3.21, Driving Screen Navigation, ICU4Me
• Settings
• Leg information
Gauge
Display
Screens
(if selected)
Use the UP and DOWN navigation switches on the
steering wheel to navigate through the driving screens.
• Temperature
• Trip information
3.13
Enter to
Stationary
Menu
A small numerical fraction is displayed in the upper
right-hand corner of each screen to indicate the number of available screens or options to scroll through.
See Fig. 3.23. Press the OK button on the left-hand
steering wheel pod to select a menu choice. Press
Instruments
Menu
Trip Info
ICU Info
Fuel Info
Settings
Trip Info
Fuel Info
Engine Info
1/7
Trip
Leg
1/2
Miles: 123456.7
Gallons: 123456.7
Avg. MPG: 123.4
1/3
OK
Menu
Engine Info
Diagnostics
02/23/2015
Service
Trip Info
f040824a
OK
Use the UP and DOWN navigation switches on the
steering wheel to navigate through the parked menus.
Fig. 3.22, Parked Menus, ICU4Me
the LEFT navigation switch to back out of a selected
menu or submenu. Use the UP navigation switch to
scroll up, and the DOWN navigation switch to scroll
down.
When navigating the parked menus, the left side of
the driver message center displays a "breadcrumb
menu" to show the order of menus and submenus
that have been selected during the current navigation.
Trip Information
The ICU can record data for one trip segment and
one leg segment. When trip information is reset, all
the leg information is reset as well.
Fuel Information
Using this menu, the driver can view the total fuel
used since the last reset, the total idle gallons used
since the last reset, and the average MPG since the
last reset.
Engine Information
Using this menu, the driver can view engine miles,
engine hours, gallons used, PTO hours, and PTO
gallons. Engine oil level is optional for Detroit engines. The information contained in the Engine Information screens cannot be reset.
Menu
Trip Info
Trip
12/11/2014
f611193a
Fig. 3.23, Parked Menu Navigation, ICU4Me
Diagnostics
Active faults are displayed in the diagnostics menu.
See Fig. 3.24. If there are any active faults, the total
number of faults is displayed in parenthesis next to
the affected controller. To view specific active faults,
press the OK button on the left-hand steering wheel
pod. Press the OK button to toggle between the text
description and the failure code for each selected
fault.
Service Information
Using this menu, the driver can enable, disable, and
set service intervals for engine miles or engine
hours. After enabling service intervals, select interval
unit (miles or hours), and the interval duration.
Settings
The settings menu contains the controls for the following settings:
3.14
Instruments
Menu
Diagnostics
Active (12)
Historic (0)
1/2
Menu
Settings
Gauge Disp.
06/26/2012
x
1/6
Axle Temp
Air Pressure
Engine Oil Temp
f611195
OK
Fig. 3.25, Selecting Gauges to Display, ICU4Me
Overhead Instrument Panel
Menu
Diagnostics
Active
ABS (1)
Engine (3)
MSF (1)
1/3
Accelerator Pedal
Problem Detected
1/3
OK
Diagnostics
Active
Engine (3)
12/11/2014
f611194a
Fig. 3.24, Diagnostics Menu Navigation, ICU4Me
• Display (includes brightness, display light, and
night mode settings)
• Gauge select
• Language
• Temperature warning enable/disable
• Units
The Gauge Select submenu allows the driver to select certain gauge values for display in the message
field while driving. See Fig. 3.25. Use the UP and
DOWN navigation switches on the steering wheel to
scroll through the list of available gauges, then press
the OK button to select a desired gauge. The OK
button can also be used to uncheck boxes if
necessary.
ICU Information
The ICU Information screen displays the part numbers for the instrument cluster and software.
3.15
The overhead instrument panel typically holds a citizen’s band (C/B) radio, an AM/FM radio, a digital
clock, and storage areas with netting. The underside
of the overhead console also holds the sun visors
and the dome/reading light assembly. For more information on the dome/reading light assembly, see
Chapter 8.
4
Driver Controls
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Windshield Wiper and Washer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Suspension/Trailer Connection Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Adjustable Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Radio/Bluetooth Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Driver Controls
Control Panels
NOTE: Western Star vehicles are offered with
various chassis and body components. Because
of the various options, the information contained
in this chapter may not apply to every vehicle.
2
The right-hand dash control panel contains a face
vent, the majority of the driver switch controls, automated and automatic transmission controls, and the
OnGuard display module, if equipped.
The ignition switch control panel (below the righthand dash panel) contains the ignition switch, cigarette lighter, and climate controls.
The instrument cluster is located behind the steering
wheel.
Fig. 4.1 shows a typical dash control panel layout.
6
05/07/2001
1
1. Ignition Switch
f610492
2. Cigarette Lighter
Fig. 4.2, Ignition Switch and Cigarette Lighter
The following functions are operable when the ignition switch is in the OFF position (regardless of
whether the key is inserted):
• high-beam headlights
• taillights
1
• brake lights
2
• road lights
• dome lights
3
• clearance lights
• turn signals
5
• hazard warning lights
4
08/08/2014
f611256
• utility and baggage lights
NOTE: Control locations may vary from those shown
depending on vehicle options.
• spotlights
1.
2.
3.
4.
• electric horn
Lighting Switches
Parking Brake
Trailer Air Supply
Axle and Fifth Wheel
Switches
5. Trailer Brake Lever
6. OnGuard
Fig. 4.1, Dash Control Panel
Ignition Switch
The ignition switch has four positions: OFF, ACCESSORY, ON, and START. See Fig. 4.2.
In the OFF position, the key slot is vertical. The key
can be inserted and removed only in the OFF position.
• clock
• refrigerator
• television
Turn the key counterclockwise to the ACCESSORY
position. In addition to all the functions that are operable with the ignition switch in the OFF position, the
following functions are operable when the switch is in
the ACCESSORY position:
• radio/stereo system
• heater and A/C fan
• mirror defog
4.1
Driver Controls
• windshield wipers
Driving Lights
• beacons
Driving lights are designed to extend the range of the
high-beam headlights, and can only be activated
when the headlight high-beams are on. When headlights are dimmed, the driving lights automatically
turn off.
• power windows
• windshield washer
• outside air temperature display
Turn the key clockwise past the OFF position to the
ON position. With the switch in the ON position, the
warning and indicator lamps illuminate. Wait for three
seconds before starting the engine.
Turn the key clockwise past the ON position to the
START position and start the engine. Do not operate
the starter longer than thirty seconds, and wait at
least two minutes between starting attempts to allow
the starter to cool. Release the key the moment the
engine starts.
Switching on the ignition and releasing the parking
brake automatically activates the daytime running
lights, if equipped. The daytime running lights will
operate until the parking brake is applied or the
headlights are turned on.
Lighting Controls
IMPORTANT: Unless otherwise noted below,
press the upper half of the switch to activate the
desired light(s). Press the lower half of the
switch to turn the light(s) off.
Exterior Lighting Controls
Exterior light controls are listed here in alphabetical
order. See Fig. 4.3 for exterior light locations. At the
rear of the vehicle there are taillights, brake lights
with turn signals, backup lights, and optional utility
lights.
See Fig. 4.4 for exterior and interior light switches.
Backup Lights
Backup lights are activated automatically when the
vehicle is in reverse, and are designed to be used
while backing up at night.
Clearance Lights
Press the upper half of the clearance lights switch to
activate all clearance lamps including back-of-sleeper
and mirrors.
Fog Lights
Fog lights are designed to reduce glare in foggy conditions. The headlights must be on and set on low
beam for the fog lights to activate.
Hazard Warning Lights
Press the upper half of the hazard light switch to activate all of the turn signal lights. Both of the telltales
on the instrument cluster will flash. To cancel the
hazard lights, press the lower half of the switch.
Headlights
The headlight switch is operated by pushing the
upper half of the switch once for the parking lights,
illuminating the taillights and side marker lamps on
both the tractor and trailer. Pressing the upper half of
the switch a second time activates the headlights. An
audible warning will sound if the lights are left on
when the ignition is turned off and the driver-side
door is open.
High-Beam Headlights
With the low-beam headlights on, push the turnsignal lever away from you to turn on the high-beam
headlights. See Fig. 4.5. To turn off the high-beam
headlights, pull the lever to the middle position.
With the low-beam headlights on, pull the lever towards you to flash the high-beam headlights momentarily.
When the high-beam headlights are on, a blue telltale illuminates on the instrument cluster.
Headlight Interrupt
The headlight interrupt switch is located on the lefthand switch pod of the steering wheel. See Fig. 4.6.
When the headlight interrupt switch is activated, the
daytime running lights blink. The headlight interrupt
switch only operates when the headlights are on.
4.2
Driver Controls
1
2
1
3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
08/19/2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clearance Light
Identification Lights
Mirror Marker Light
Clearance Light
f546089
5. Side Marker Light
6. Front Turn Signal
7. Headlight, Low Beam
8. Combination Fog/Driving Light
9. Headlight, High Beam
10. LED Accent Light
Fig. 4.3, Exterior Lights
Turn Signals
The turn-signal lever is mounted on the left-hand
side of the steering column. Pulling the turn-signal
lever up activates the right-turn signal; pushing it
down activates the left-turn signal. The lever is typically a non-canceling combination turn-signal, windshield wiper/washer switch, and headlight control
unit. See Fig. 4.5.
When a turn signal is activated, a green telltale light
flashes on the instrument panel.
On a self-canceling turn signal lever, the lever automatically returns to the neutral position when the
4.3
steering wheel returns to the straight-ahead position
after a turn.
Trailer Clearance Lights
The trailer clearance lights switch activates the trailer
clearance lamps independent of the tractor lamps.
Utility Lights
Utility lights can be swivel-mounted on the upper half
of the cab, or flush-mounted on the back of the cab
or sleeper. Press the upper half of the switch to activate it. Press the lower half of the switch to turn it
off.
Driver Controls
1
2
3
CL / ID
HEAD
LIGHTS
DRIVING
LIGHTS
LIGHTS
DASH
LIGHTS
12/05/2014
1. Headlights Switch
2. Tractor Clearance Lights Switch
3. Driving Lights Switch
9
SLEEPER
LIGHTS
8
5
4
UTILITY
LIGHTS
FOG
LIGHTS
TRAILER
CL / ID
LIGHTS
7
4. Fog Lights Switch
5. Utility Lights Switch
6. Hazard Flasher Switch
6
f611257
7. Trailer Clearance Lights Switch
8. Sleeper Lights Switch
9. Dash Lights Switch
Fig. 4.4, Exterior and Interior Light Switches
Interior Lighting Controls
The cab is equipped with door-activated dome lamps
on the ceiling and under the overhead console, and
courtesy lights on the bottom edge of each door and
under the dash. Depending on vehicle configuration,
there may also be LH and RH reading/map lamps.
When the instrument panel lights are on, most switch
icons are backlit with a colored light to allow the
driver to find switches more easily in the dark. When
a switch is activated, an LED on the switch is illuminated.
For sleeper and baggage compartment lights, see
Chapter 8.
Dash Lights
The dash lights are controlled by the dash lights
switch (Fig. 4.4, item 9). With the headlight switch in
position 1 (marker lights on) or position 2 (headlights
on), tapping the upper half of the dash lights switch
increases the instrument cluster and switch backlighting incrementally. Note that tapping the switch past
the maximum setting also activates the dome lamps
and courtesy lights. Tapping the lower half of the
switch dims the dash lights.
Cab Dome Lamps and Courtesy Lights
The dome lamps on the cab ceiling and overhead
console, and the courtesy lights on the cab doors
and under the dash are activated when a cab door is
opened. Closing the doors will cause the lights to be
turned off after 30 seconds. If a cab door is left open,
a timer turns the lights off after 15 minutes.
Both the ceiling and overhead console dome lamps
can be activated using the dash lights switch
(Fig. 4.4, item 9) when the headlight switch is in position 1 (marker lights on) or position 2 (headlights
on). Tap the top half of the dash lights switch until
the dome lamps are activated. Tap the bottom half of
the switch to turn the dome lamps off.
4.4
Driver Controls
powered by the ECC module) by pushing on the
lens.
4
Red Map Lamps
1
The red map lamps (Fig. 4.7) on the overhead console are operated by pushing on the lens.
3
2
08/08/2014
f611264
1. Headlight Control
Symbols
2. Windshield Wiper
Switch
3. Windshield Washer
Switch
4. Turn Signal Symbol
Fig. 4.5, Steering Column-Mounted Turn Signal Lever
4
1
2
2
05/19/2015
1
f602556
1. Red Map Lamp
2. Clear Dome/Reading
Lamp
Fig. 4.7, Overhead Console Lamps
1
Horn Controls
Air Horn
3
The air horn is controlled by a wire lanyard hanging
from the center of the overhead console. Pull down
on the lanyard to sound the air horn.
2
Electric Horn
07/30/2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
f611255
Volume Up Switch
Volume Down Switch
Headlight Interrupt Switch
ICU4Me Navigation Switches
Fig. 4.6, Left-Hand Steering Wheel Switches
Overhead Console Dome/Reading Lamps
The overhead console dome/reading lamps (Fig. 4.7)
are powered by both the ECC module and the battery. When powered by the ECC module, they are
controlled together with the cab dome lamps (see
"Cab Dome Lamps and Courtesy Lights" above).
They can also be operated individually (when not
4.5
The electric horn control is located in the center of
the steering wheel. To sound the horn, press down
on the top of the steering wheel center pad. The
horn will sound for the duration that the button
pressed, up to 60 seconds.
Powertrain Controls
Aftertreatment System Regen
Switches
NOTE: See Chapter 12 for detailed information
about the operation of the regeneration (regen)
switches and the aftertreatment system (ATS).
Driver Controls
The regen request switch is used to initiate a parked
regen. See Fig. 4.8.
Some vehicles are equipped with an optional regen
request/inhibit switch. To request a parked regen,
press the upper half of the switch. To stop a regen in
progress or prevent the start of a regen, press the
lower half of the switch. Regen will not occur until the
switch is no longer active.
Differential Lock Switch
The differential lock switch provides maximum traction for slippery conditions by forcing the wheels on
each drive axle governed by the switch to rotate together. Engagement can be at any speed, provided
the wheels are not slipping or spinning.
Interaxle Lock Switch
The interaxle lock switch allows the driver to lock the
drive axles together, causing the drive axle shafts to
rotate together. Use this feature only under adverse
road conditions where greater traction is needed.
Leave the control in the UNLOCK position for normal
highway operation. When a spinning or slipping action occurs at any of the drive wheels, press the
upper half of the switch to LOCK the differential and
prevent the wheels from spinning.
1
08/07/2014
2
NOTICE
f611258
1. Regen Request Switch
2. Regen Request/Inhibit Switch
Fig. 4.8, Aftertreatment System Regen Switches
Axle Switches
Axle switch controls are listed here in alphabetical
order. See Fig. 4.9.
Do not shift into LOCK while the rear wheels are
spinning. Come to a halt before engaging to prevent damage to the interaxle and main differentials.
Do not permit rear wheels to spin freely for more
than ten seconds when traction is lost. Shift into
LOCK to prevent damage to the interaxle and
main differentials.
Lift Axle Switch
LIFT
AXLE
The lift axle switch controls the lift axle operation.
Pushing the upper half of the switch will lower the lift
axle.
Engine Brake Switches
NOTE: See Chapter 13 for detailed information
about engine brake operation.
08/07/2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
3
4
f611259
Rear Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch
Forward Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch
Interaxle Lock Switch
Lift Axle Switch
Fig. 4.9, Axle Switches
NOTE: See Chapter 17 for detailed information
about drive axle functions.
Whenever vehicle braking is required on good road
conditions, the engine brake may be used in conjunction with the service brakes. There is no time
limit for operation of the engine brake. However, an
engine brake does not provide the precise control of,
and is not a substitute for, service brakes.
The engine brake control is located on the right-hand
steering-column-mounted lever. At the top position,
4.6
Driver Controls
the engine brake is off, and at the three lower positions, the brake is on and the intensity (low, medium,
high) increases with each step down. See Fig. 4.10
derate. The switch must be pressed again after five
seconds to obtain a subsequent override. See
Fig. 4.11, item 2.
NOTICE
0
1
2
3
02/19/2013
When the derate process begins, immediately get
the vehicle serviced in order to prevent severe
damage to the engine.
Hill Start Aid Override Switch
Some vehicles are equipped with a Hill Start Aid
(HSA) feature to prevent the vehicle from rolling
while on steep grades and to allow for a controlled
launch. HSA is "on" by default. It can be turned off
by pressing and releasing the HSA override switch
on the dash (see Fig. 4.12).
f270164a
0. Off
1. Low
2. Medium
3. High
Fig. 4.10, Engine Brake Positions
Engine Fan Switch
HSA
OVR
Press the upper half of the engine fan switch to override the automatic fan control and cause the engine
fan to run continuously. See Fig. 4.11, item 1. This
switch is intended for temporary use, or if the automatic fan control fails. Press the lower half of the
switch to return to automatic fan control.
08/14/2014
f611270
Fig. 4.12, Hill Start Aid Override Switch
Power Takeoff Controls
ENGINE
FAN
Engine power takeoffs (PTO) are devices used to tap
into engine power to run auxiliary devices, such as
hydraulic pumps that power additional equipment.
The following instructions are general guidelines for
operating a PTO.
SHUTDOWN
OVERRIDE
1.
Set the parking brake and put the transmission in
neutral.
f611260
2.
Press the PTO switch. See Fig. 4.13. When the
light is steadily illuminated, the PTO is engaged
and ready to operate. In stationary mode, the
vehicle must remain in neutral with the parking
brake set.
Some vehicles may have a shutdown override
switch, which can be used to momentarily override
the shutdown sequence. This switch resets the shutdown timer, restoring power to the level before the
3.
To activate the mobile mode, shift from neutral to
reverse, 1st, or 2nd gear. The clutch will open
and the PTO will disengage for a moment.
11/19/2014
1
2
Fig. 4.11, Engine Switches
Shutdown Override Switch
4.7
Driver Controls
4
AUX
PTO
08/14/2014
3
f611269
1
A
2
Fig. 4.13, PTO Switch
4.
Touch the accelerator pedal to close the clutch
and engage the PTO in mobile mode. The PTO
may be operated with the transmission in reverse, neutral, 1st, or 2nd gear only.
NOTE: Do not attempt to change gears while
the vehicle is moving. The transmission will ignore the request.
5.
To end the mobile mode, bring the vehicle to a
stop. The clutch will open and shut down power
to the PTO.
6.
To resume stationary mode, shift to neutral. The
PTO will engage.
7.
To end stationary mode, press the PTO switch.
When the light in the switch goes out, power to
the PTO is shut off.
(−)
(+)
B
Transmission Controls
Detroit™ Automated Transmissions
NOTE: See Chapter 15 for complete Detroit
automated transmission operating instructions.
Vehicles with Detroit transmissions use the multifunction control shown in Fig. 4.14. This control moves in
two directions and has two switches. It is used to
request manual shifts, change shift mode, set engine
brake levels, and control specialty engine brake functions during cruise control operation.
Manual Transmissions
NOTE: See Chapter 16 for complete manual
transmission operating instructions.
if equipped, the transmission range control and splitter valves are attached to the gear shift knob.
C
05/30/2012
A.
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.
4.
f270163a
Front View
Shift Requests
Four positions for engine brake settings
Engine Brake Symbol
D/N/R Switch
Mode Switch
Gear Shift Symbol
Fig. 4.14, Detroit Multifunction Control
To operate a range-shift transmission, move the shift
knob through all the low-range gear positions and
4.8
Driver Controls
• Cruise Accelerate/SET Button—Press to set
then pull the range-preselection lever up to move into
the high-range ratios. Use the same shift knob positions in both the low and high ranges.
the cruise speed while the vehicle is traveling
at the desired speed. Press and hold to increase the set cruise speed.
Dependent on the transmission model, some ratios
can be split using the splitter-control button (located
on the side of the shift knob).
• CNCL Button —Press to pause the cruise con-
trol, while retaining the speed setting in
memory. The cruise control can also be disengaged, while retaining the speed memory, by
depressing the brake or clutch pedals.
Cruise Control
• Cruise Decelerate/RES Button—Press to re-
WARNING
sume the set speed. Press and hold to decrease the set cruise speed.
Do not use the cruise control system when driving conditions do not permit maintaining a constant speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
roads with a loose driving surface. Failure to follow this precaution could cause a collision or
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in personal injury or property damage.
6
1
5
4
NOTICE
When the cruise control is engaged, do not attempt to shift gears without using the clutch
pedal. Failure to follow this precaution will result
in a temporarily uncontrolled increase in engine
speed. Transmission damage and gear stripping
could result.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a Detroit
multifunction control, setting the cruise control
with the engine brake on will activate Descent
Control Mode. Moving the lever to the top position will resume the set cruise speed. Moving
the lever down to engage the engine brake after
the cruise control has been set will activate Deceleration Mode. See "Descent Control and Deceleration Modes, Detroit™ Automated Transmissions" in this chapter.
The cruise control is operated by four buttons
mounted in the right-hand switch pod of the steering
wheel. See Fig. 4.15.
• Cruise On/Off Button—Press to turn cruise
control on or off. When cruise control is on, the
ICU message center displays relevant cruise
control icons and the set speed. The speed
memory will be retained until the cruise control
is disabled with the ON/OFF button, or the ignition is turned off.
4.9
7
08/08/2014
2
3
f611265
1. Cruise Accelerate/SET
2. Marker Interrupt
3. Cruise Decelerate/
Resume
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bluetooth—End Call
Mute
Bluetooth—Start Call
Cruise On/Off
Fig. 4.15, Right-Hand Steering Wheel Switches
1.
To cruise at a particular speed:
1.1
Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
1.2
Depress the accelerator pedal until the
speedometer reaches the desired speed.
NOTE: Cruise control is cancelled if the
brake or clutch pedal is depressed, or vehicle speed drops below the minimum cruise
control speed.
1.3
Press the cruise accelerate/SET button to
set the desired speed.
NOTE: The speed memory is lost whenever the
ignition switch is turned to OFF, or cruise control
is turned off.
Driver Controls
2.
To disengage the cruise control, do one of the
following:
• Press the CNCL button in the center of the
right-hand control pod.
• Depress the brake pedal.
CC
LIMIT
• Depress the clutch pedal (on a manual
transmission only).
3.
To resume a preselected cruise speed:
3.1
Ensure cruise control is on.
3.2
Press the cruise decelerate/RES button.
Cruise will return to the last set speed.
NOTE: If vehicle speed drops below the
minimum cruise control speed, cruise control
will disengage. To resume to the preselected
cruise speed, increase vehicle speed to
above minimum cruise control speed and
press the cruise decelerate/RES button.
4.
5.
To increase cruise speed, press the cruise
accelerate/SET button until the vehicle accelerates to the desired speed.
To decrease cruise speed, press the cruise
decelerate/RES button until the vehicle decelerates to the desired speed.
Cruise Control ("CC") Limiter
On vehicles equipped with a CC limiter switch (see
Fig. 4.16), the cruise control limiter allows the vehicle
to exceed the set cruise control speed before engine
braking is applied. The CC limiter switch provides
more flexibility to the existing cruise control limit function, allowing the driver to tune the cruise function to
better suit driving preferences and conditions. To select a limit, use the three-position CC Limiter switch
on the dash. See Table 4.1 for switch settings.
CC Limiter Switch Settings
Position
Approximate Overrun Setting
Top in
3 mph (5 km/h)
Middle
6 mph (9 km/h)
Bottom in
Unlimited
Table 4.1, CC Limiter Switch Settings
08/07/2014
f611263
Fig. 4.16, CC Limiter Switch
Descent Control and Deceleration
Modes, Detroit™ Automated
Transmissions
On vehicles equipped with a Detroit multifunction
control (Fig. 4.17), the functions of the lever positions for engine brake control change when cruise
control is set. Two distinct modes can be activated:
• Descent Control Mode—engine braking keeps
the speed below cruise set speed; throttle is
not automatically applied.
• Deceleration Mode—engine braking activates
to reduce vehicle speed (with no lower limit) at
a constant rate.
Descent Control Mode
Descent Control Mode keeps the vehicle speed
below the set cruise speed on a downhill.
To activate Descent Control Mode, set the cruise
control speed with the engine brake on (Fig. 4.17,
positions 1, 2, or 3). In this mode, all three levels of
engine braking will be employed to to keep the
speed below the set cruise speed. This mode will not
keep the speed above the lower limit of the set
speed, so it is possible to eventually coast to a stop,
unless the lever is moved to "engine brake off" (position 0), or throttle is applied. After throttle application,
the Descent Control Mode is resumed.
Moving the lever to "engine brake off" (position 0)
cancels Descent Control Mode and resumes cruise
speed. To reactivate Descent Control Mode, reset the
cruise control speed with the lever in position 1, 2, or
3.
4.10
Driver Controls
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
02/19/2013
f270164a
0. Resume cruise control set speed.
1, 2, 3. Descent Control maintains set speed.
Fig. 4.17, Descent Control Mode Positions, Detroit
Multifunction Control
Deceleration Mode
Deceleration Mode reduces the vehicle speed at a
constant rate.
With the cruise control speed set, activate Deceleration Mode by moving the lever to engine brake on
(Fig. 4.18, position 1, 2, or 3). This mode engages
one of the engine brake levels, depending on the
lever position. The vehicle will decelerate at a constant rate until the vehicle comes to a stop, unless
throttle applied to override the deceleration, or the
lever is moved to "engine brake off" (position 0).
3
02/19/2013
f270164a
0. Resume cruise control
set speed.
1. Low
2. Medium
3. High
Fig. 4.18, Deceleration Mode Positions, Detroit
Multifunction Control
brakes. Push the knob in to release the tractor and
trailer spring parking brakes. Before the spring parking brakes can be released, the air pressure in either
air brake system must be at least 65 psi (447 kPa).
If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
brakes, pull the parking brake valve out to apply the
tractor parking brakes and the trailer service brakes.
1
2
Moving the lever to position 0 resumes the previously
set cruise control speed.
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls
NOTE: See Chapter 13 for detailed information
about brake systems.
03/10/99
Parking Brake Control Valve
1. Trailer Air Supply Valve (red knob)
2. Parking Brake Control Valve (yellow knob)
NOTICE
Do not step on the service brake pedal while the
parking brakes are applied. To do so can cause
damage to the brake mechanisms.
The yellow diamond-shaped knob operates the parking brake valve. See Fig. 4.19. Pull the knob out to
apply both the tractor and the trailer spring parking
4.11
f610291
Fig. 4.19, Brake Valve Control Knobs
Trailer Air Supply Valve
The red octagonal-shaped knob operates the trailer
air supply valve, which charges the trailer air supply
system and releases the trailer spring parking
brakes. See Fig. 4.19.
Driver Controls
After the vehicle and its air hoses are connected to a
trailer and the pressure in the air system is at least
65 psi (447 kPa), push the trailer air supply valve
knob in (and leave it in) to charge the trailer air supply system and release the trailer spring parking
brakes. Pull the trailer air supply valve out before
disconnecting a trailer or when operating a vehicle
without a trailer.
Trailer Brake Lever
The trailer brake lever is used to apply the trailer service brakes without applying the truck or tractor service brakes. It is usually mounted on the right-hand
control panel. See Fig. 4.20. The valve can be partially or fully applied, but in any partially on position it
will be overridden by a full application of the service
brake pedal. Move the lever down to apply the trailer
brakes; move the lever up to release the trailer
brakes. The lever will automatically return to the up
position when it is released.
The ABS is designed to communicate with a trailer
ABS, if they are compatible. Compatibility will result
in the illumination of the trailer ABS lamp during vehicle start-up and fault detection. The trailer ABS
lamp will not illuminate unless a compatible trailer is
connected to the tractor.
Vehicles with ABS may have Automatic Traction Control (ATC). On these vehicles, the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin during reduced-traction
situations. In normal braking applications, the standard air brake system is in effect.
ATC includes a deep snow and mud option to increase available traction on extra-soft surfaces like
snow, mud, or gravel. A switch labeled ATC will be
located on the dash. See Fig. 4.21. Press the switch
to temporarily allow more drive wheel spin. The activation of the deep snow and mud option is indicated
by a flashing WHEEL SPIN lamp. Press the switch
again to cycle the system back to normal operation.
ATC
DEEP MUD
AND SNOW
08/08/2014
f611262
Fig. 4.21, ATC Switch
f610591
10/17/2001
Fig. 4.20, Trailer Brake Lever
Antilock Braking System
The Meritor™ WABCO® Antilock Braking System
(ABS) passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at all
times, and controls wheel speed during emergency
stops or wheel lock situations.
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
braking distance.
NOTICE
The deep snow and mud option is intended to be
used under specific slippery conditions that require momentary increased wheel spin. Using
this option for an extended period of time may
damage the brake system.
Windshield Wiper and Washer
Controls
NOTICE
Do not attempt to manually move the windshield
wiper arms. Wiper motor damage will occur if the
arms are forcibly moved.
4.12
Driver Controls
The windshield wipers and washer controls are on
the multi-function turn signal lever on the left-hand
side of the steering column. See Fig. 4.22.
To operate the windshield washers, press and hold
the button in. After a short delay, the washer will
pump windshield washer fluid onto the windshield for
as long as the washer button is pressed. The windshield wipers will turn on at low speed while the
washer button is pressed. After the button is released, the wipers will continue to operate for one to
several wipe cycles, depending on how long the
wash button was pressed initially.
4
1
3
The windshield washer button is located at the end
of the turn signal lever. Momentarily press the windshield washer button to initiate a single wipe without
activating the washer pump. The wipers will swipe
one full cycle and return to the inactive position.
Suspension/Trailer Connection
Controls
2
Air Suspension Height Control Switch
08/08/2014
1. Headlight Control
Symbols
2. Windshield Wiper
Switch
f611264
3. Windshield Washer
Switch
4. Turn Signal Symbol
Fig. 4.22, Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls
The wipers are operated by a rotary switch on the
turn signal lever. There are five settings, marked on
the dial by symbols for off, two intermittent settings,
and two continuous speeds.
Turn the wipers on by rotating the rotary switch up.
Rotate the switch further to increase the speed of the
wipers through the two intermittent settings, then to
low and high speeds. Rotate the switch down to slow
the wipers down. Rotate the switch as far down as it
will go to turn the wipers off.
For wiper intermittent operation, there are two settings. The first intermittent setting has a default interval of 6 seconds, but the interval is programmable
from 1 to 25 seconds. To program the interval, rotate
the switch from the first intermittent position to the
OFF position, wait for the desired interval between
wipes to lapse (between 1 and 25 seconds), and
then move the switch back to the first intermittent
position. If the switch is kept in the OFF position for
more than 50 seconds, the interval changes back to
the default of 6 seconds. The second intermittent setting has an interval of 1 second, and is not programmable.
4.13
NOTICE
Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground
such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the
suspension air springs from re-inflating.
The air suspension height control switch is used to
adjust the vehicle height to aid in coupling or uncoupling from a trailer. See Fig. 4.23. Setting the switch
to DOWN deflates the air springs to lower the rear of
the vehicle. In the UP position, the air springs inflate
to raise the rear of the vehicle to normal ride height.
NOTICE
Never exhaust air from the suspension while
driving. When the air is exhausted, the suspension will not absorb road shocks, and components may be damaged.
A red LED in the switch is illuminated when the suspension is deflated.
ECAS Dash Switches
Vehicles with Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
(ECAS) may be equipped with either dash switches
(Fig. 4.24) or a remote control unit, not both.
Driver Controls
mode will automatically deactivate when the vehicle
reaches 45 mph (72 kmh).
When Load Transfer mode is active, "Load Transfer"
will display in the message field of the driver message center. See Figure 4.25.
02/04/2015
f611291
Fig. 4.25, Load Transfer Notification
07/22/2011
f545805
Fig. 4.23, Air Suspension Height Control Switch
SUSP HGT (Suspension Height)
If the suspension is at normal height:
• each up press increases the suspension height
an increment, unless the suspension is at
maximum height
• a down press lowers the suspension to its lowLOAD
XFER
est set-point (usually axle stops)
SUSP
HGT
If the suspension is below normal height:
• an up press increases the suspension height to
normal ride height
1
11/19/2014
1. Load Transfer
2
f611279
2. Suspension Height
Fig. 4.24, ECAS Dash Switches
LOAD XFER (Load Transfer)
This switch controls the ECAS Manual Load Transfer
function by adjusting suspension air pressure. Use
this function to minimize wheel slippage in road conditions where traction may be a concern.
• a down press does nothing; the suspension is
already at its lowest point
If the suspension is above normal height:
• each up press increases the suspension height
an increment, unless the suspension is at
maximum height
• a down press lowers the suspension to normal
ride height
Messages about the ride height status will display in
the message field of the driver message center. See
Figure 4.26.
The ECAS Load Transfer feature applies the maximum available vehicle load on the drive axle, up to
the maximum allowable limit, determined by the
gross axle weight rating (GAWR). In bobtail or with a
loaded trailer less than the GAWR, the tag axle supports a negligible load while the drive axle supports
nearly the full weight. Above the GAWR, the drive
axle is loaded with approximately the maximum allowable load and the tag supports the remainder.
If the suspension is outside normal ride height
(amber lamp on), the ECAS system will automatically
return the suspension to normal ride height when
vehicle speed reaches or exceeds a set speed (usually set to 5 mph).
Load transfer mode can be deactivated by holding up
on the dash switch for 4 seconds. Load transfer
Once the key is turned off, the ECAS will enter
Standby mode, remaining powered and adjusting to
ECAS Standby Mode, Dash Switch
4.14
Driver Controls
ECAS Remote Control Keys and Functions
02/04/2015
f611287
Fig. 4.26, Example of Ride Height Message
level and load changes for 1 hour. To cancel Standby
mode on vehicles with ECAS dash switches, turn the
key from OFF to ON to OFF in less than 1.5 seconds. Confirm the deactivation of standby mode by
pressing the SUSP HGT switch, which should not
adjust the suspension.
ECAS Remote Control Unit
Some vehicles equipped with Electronically Controlled Air Suspension (ECAS) have a remote control
unit to lower and raise the rear suspension. See
Table 4.2 for keys and functions.
If the suspension is outside normal ride height
(amber lamp on), the ECAS system will automatically
return the suspension to normal ride height when
vehicle speed reaches or exceeds a set speed (usually set to 5 mph).
Messages about the ride height status will display in
the message field of the driver message center.
ECAS Standby Mode, Remote Control
Once the key is turned off, the ECAS will enter
Standby mode, remaining powered and adjusting to
level and load changes for 1 hour. To cancel Standby
mode on vehicles with a remote control, turn on the
remote control then hold the STOP key on the remote for 2 seconds. Confirm the deactivation of
standby mode by attempting to turn the remote on
and adjust the suspension, which should not be possible.
08/16/2013
Key
f611211
Function
Remote Control On/Off. The middle
light will remain lit while the remote is
active.
Memory keys. Pressing the Stop key
and a memory key simultaneously will
store the current height. Once stored,
pressing the key will adjust the
vehicle to the stored height.
Normal height key. This key will
return the vehicle to normal ride
height.
Lift and lower keys. These keys will
raise or lower the rear suspension
height.
The Stop key. Pressing the Stop key
will interrupt and stop all adjustments
being made by the remote control.
When the key is off, holding the Stop
key for 2 seconds will cancel the 1
hour Standby mode.
Table 4.2, ECAS Remote Control Keys and Functions
Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch
NOTICE
Do not activate the fifth wheel slide control valve
while the vehicle is in motion. To do so could
cause damage to the fifth wheel member, the
4.15
Driver Controls
kingpin, the cab or trailer, and ultimately to the
drivetrain.
The fifth wheel air slide switch permits repositioning
of the sliding fifth wheel from inside the cab. See
Fig. 4.27. Moving the air slide control valve switch to
the lock position deactivates the control valve and
locks the fifth wheel to the baseplate. Moving the
switch to the unlock position activates the control
valve and unlocks the fifth wheel slide mechanism,
allowing changes to the total length of the tractortrailer and changes to axle loads to comply with varying jurisdictional laws. For detailed operating instructions for fifth wheel slide, coupling, and uncoupling
procedures, refer to Chapter 18.
07/22/2011
TRAILER
AUX
11/19/2014
f611261
Fig. 4.28, Trailer Auxiliary Switch
the steering wheel can be adjusted up-and-down and
tilted fore-and-aft. Once the wheel is in the desired
position, lock the position by pushing the lever in toward the column until it goes no further and is parallel to the column itself.
f545806
Fig. 4.27, Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch
Trailer Auxiliary Switch
A
Trailers that are equipped with pneumatic brakes and
used in North America or South America are generally equipped with power for the trailer lights. The
connection is passed from the vehicle to the trailer
via the primary receptacle, controlled by a dash
switch.
Press the top of the switch to activate the trailer auxiliary function. Press the bottom of the switch to turn
trailer auxiliary function off. See Fig. 4.28.
Adjustable Steering Column
Controls
08/19/2014
f462249
A. To unlock the steering column for adjustment, pull
the lever out and away from the column.
Fig. 4.29, Steering Column Locking Lever
To unlock the steering column to adjust it, pull the
steering column locking lever out and away from the
column. See Fig. 4.29. With the column unlocked,
4.16
Driver Controls
• heater and air conditioner
WARNING
• heater and air conditioner with automatic tem-
Make sure that the steering column is locked before driving the vehicle. Never attempt to adjust
the column while driving the vehicle. Doing so
could cause loss of vehicle control, personal injury, and property damage.
perature control (ATC)
Options for a sleeper unit include:
• no heater or air conditioner
• heater only
• heater and air conditioner
Radio/Bluetooth Controls
Bluetooth controls are located on the steering wheel.
Volume up and down buttons are on the left-hand
switch pod. Start call, end call, and mute buttons are
on the right-hand switch pod. See Fig. 4.30. For additional radio operating instructions, see the radio
manufacturer’s manual.
• heater and air conditioner with ATC
The ATC feature automatically controls the heating
and cooling system to maintain the cab and sleeper
air temperature close to the temperature set by the
user. The ATC adjusts the air temperature blown
through the air outlets to maintain the selected tem-
5
1
2
4
3
08/14/2014
f611271
1. Bluetooth—Start Call
2. Mute
3. Bluetooth—End Call
4. Volume Down
5. Volume Up
Fig. 4.30, Radio/Bluetooth Controls on the Steering Wheel
Climate Controls
perature.
NOTE: See Chapter 6 for detailed climate control panel operating instructions.
Seat Controls
The climate control panel allows you to control the
heating, ventilating, defrosting, and air conditioning
functions. See Fig. 4.31. Western Star vehicles have
several heater and air conditioner options.
Options for the cab include:
• heater only
4.17
NOTE: See Chapter 7 for detailed information
about seat controls and adjustments.
Driver Controls
2
3
4
1
BUNK
02/10/2003
A/C
7
6
4. Mode Control Switch
5. Air Conditioner Switch
1. Fan Off Position
2. Fan Switch
3. Temperature Control Switch
f610640
5
6. Bunk Switch
7. Indicator
Fig. 4.31, Cab Climate Control Panel, No ATC
WARNING
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do
so could cause personal injury.
The following is a description of adjustments that can
be made to various Western Star seats. Not all seats
have all of the adjustments listed below. See
Fig. 4.32.
1.
Backrest Tilt: This adjustment enables the backrest to pivot forward or backward.
2.
Lumbar Support: Lumbar support changes the
shape of the seat back to give more or less support to the occupant’s lumbar (lower back) area.
This adjustment is either mechanical or air controlled, depending on make and model of the
seat.
3.
Isolator: This feature reduces the amount of road
shock by isolating the occupant from the motion
of the vehicle, and allowing the upper seat to
move in a simple pendulum motion. A lockout
feature is used whenever the isolator is not desired.
4.
Height Adjustment: This adjustment moves the
entire seat up or down. The adjustment is either
manually- or air-controlled, depending on the
make of the seat.
5.
Bottom Cushion Angle, or Fore-and-Aft Bottom
Cushion Height: This adjustment enables the occupant to raise or lower the front or back of the
bottom cushion. This adjustment is easier to perform when all weight is removed from the seat.
6.
Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide, or Seat Track Adjustment: This adjustment moves the entire seat forward or backward on its track.
7.
Seat Tilt: This adjustment allows the seat assembly (back and bottom cushions) to tilt forward or
backward.
8.
Headrest Adjustment: This adjustment changes
the angle of the upper part of the backrest to
provide head and upper back support.
4.18
Driver Controls
1
3
4
2
8
5
6
7
f910149a
10/26/2000
1.
2.
3.
4.
Backrest Tilt
Lumbar Support
Isolator Feature
Height Adjustment
5. Bottom Cushion Angle (fore-andaft cushion height)
6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide (seat
track adjustment)
Fig. 4.32, General Seat Adjustments
4.19
7. Seat Tilt
8. Headrest Adjustment
5
Driver Assistance Features
OnGuard™ Collision Safety System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Departure Warning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll Stability System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
5.4
5.5
5.7
Driver Assistance Features
OnGuard™ Collision Safety
System
OnGuard CMS only brakes for lead vehicles located
directly in front of your vehicle, and does not operate
when vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
Meritor WABCO OnGuard is a forward-looking radarbased safety system. The system includes forward
collision warning, adaptive cruise control (ACC), and
collision mitigation.
Due to these limitations, the system:
• will not react and alert the operator to objects
crossing in front of the vehicle or oncoming
traffic;
OnGuard equipped vehicles have antilock brakes
(ABS) and automatic traction control (ATC), and either roll stability control (RSC) or electronic stability
control (ESC). These systems work together to enhance control of the vehicle. Depending on the situation, any of these features may apply throttle control,
engine brakes, and/or service brakes, as needed.
• should not be relied on to track lead vehicles
The front-looking antenna assembly transmits radar
signals to, and receives them back from, objects
ahead of the vehicle. To be detected, vehicles must
be within the radar field of view and provide a surface area that can reflect the radar. The distance,
speed, and angle of the vehicle ahead is calculated,
and the driver is warned of potentially dangerous
situations. The system also warns of stationary objects to alert the driver of potential obstructions
ahead in their lane.
• should not be relied upon to track smaller ob-
WARNING
The Meritor WABCO OnGuard™ Collision Safety
System is intended solely as an aid for an alert
and conscientious professional driver. It is not
intended to be relied upon to operate a vehicle.
Use the system in conjunction with rearview mirrors and other instruments to safely operate the
vehicle. Operate a vehicle equipped with the OnGuard in the same safe manner as if the CMS
were not present.
when traveling through a severe curve in the
road. Because of this, ACC is not recommended for use on winding roads;
• will alert, but not actively brake, on stationary
objects;
jects like motorcycles, mopeds, bicycles, or
pedestrians;
• should not be relied on to alert drivers to ve-
hicles in an adjacent lane.
OnGuard Display Unit
The OnGuard system controls are located in the display unit. The display provides visual and audible
warnings and messages, as well as verification of
correct system operation and faults. Menu selections
are made by pressing the up and down arrows, and
the MODE button. See Fig. 5.1 .
3
The OnGuard Collision Safety System is not a
substitute for safe, normal driving procedures,
nor will it compensate for any driver impairment
such as drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.
Failure to drive safely and use the system properly could result in personal injury and/or death
and severe property damage.
System Limitations
The OnGuard Collision Safety System may provide
little or no warning of hazards such as pedestrians,
animals, oncoming vehicles, or cross traffic.
5.1
2
1
4
10/31/2014
f611277
1. Mode
2. Day/Night Mode
3. Up
4. Down
Fig. 5.1, OnGuard Display Unit
The display includes:
• an internal speaker
Driver Assistance Features
• a graphic display
A Vehicle is Detected
• buttons to scroll and select options
When a lead vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,
the display shows that the CMS is on and the radar
is tracking a lead vehicle at the speed shown. See
Fig. 5.3.
• day/night display mode
Collision Mitigation System (CMS)
The CMS provides the driver with audible and visual
alerts when the vehicle’s following distance could
result in a rear-end collision. The OnGuard display
unit shows a graphic of the condition, enhanced by a
screen color relevant to the intensity of the situation.
See Table 5.1. If a potential rear-end collision is imminent, OnGuard’s active braking automatically applies the engine and service brakes to slow the vehicle. The active braking application is intended only
to provide early braking; the driver is still required to
recognize and react to all driving situations.
If the following distance between the vehicle and the
lead vehicle is too close, the CMS will emit an audible alert and the display background will turn yellow. The alert will end when the vehicle speed drops
below the lead vehicle speed and the following distance is increased.
230FT
IMPORTANT: CMS and active braking are not
operational at vehicle speeds below 15 mph (25
km/h).
OnGuard Display Screen Background Colors
Screen Color
Description
General operation; no lead vehicles
Blue
detected.
Green
Lead vehicle detected.
Following distance alert, accompanied
Yellow
by an audible alert.
Collision warning, stationary object
Red
warning. Accompanied with audible
alert.
Amber
Data Error
Table 5.1, OnGuard Display Screen Background
Colors
CMS
55 MPH
12/18/2014
f611143b
Fig. 5.3, CMS Lead Vehicle Detected (green)
Collision Warning
When a lead vehicle is detected traveling slower than
your vehicle, or the gap between them becomes too
close, the CMS warns of an impending collision by
emitting an urgent audible alert and displaying the
collision warning symbol with a red background. See
Fig. 5.4.
15 FT
Standby
When no lead vehicle is detected, the display shows
that the CMS is on and the radar is searching. See
Fig. 5.2.
CMS
15 MPH
12/18/2014
f611144a
Fig. 5.4, CMS Collision Warning (red)
CMS
12/18/2014
f611143c
Fig. 5.2, CMS Standby (blue)
5.2
Driver Assistance Features
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC works in conjunction with conventional cruise
control to maintain a minimum following distance
when a lead vehicle is being tracked. The minimum
following distance is maintained by automatically decelerating the vehicle using throttle, engine, and service brakes without driver intervention. When the
lead vehicle is no longer being tracked, the set cruise
control speed resumes automatically.
Standby
When no lead vehicle is detected, OnGuard ACC
operates similarly to conventional cruise control. The
cruise control set speed is shown on the OnGuard
display unit. See Fig. 5.5.
the ACC will emit an audible alert and the display
background will turn yellow. The alert will end when
vehicle speed drops below the lead vehicle’s speed
and the following distance is increased.
NOTE: The following distance alert does not
operate at speeds below 15 mph (25 km/h).
Collision Warning
If the lead vehicle is traveling slower than the driver’s
vehicle, the CMS warns of an impending collision by
emitting an urgent audible alert and displaying the
collision warning symbol with a red background. See
Fig. 5.7.
15 FT
Set: 60 MPH
Set: 60 MPH
10/31/2014
10/31/2014
f611145
Lead Vehicle Detected
When a lead vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,
the display shows that ACC is on and the radar is
tracking it. See Fig. 5.6.
230 FT
Set: 60 MPH 55 MPH
f611146
Fig. 5.6, ACC Lead Vehicle Detected (green)
If the driver uses the accelerator pedal to override
the cruise control and approach a vehicle too closely,
5.3
f611147
Fig. 5.7, ACC Collision Warning (red)
The braking control will activate and slow the vehicle.
The driver must also initiate braking.
Fig. 5.5, ACC Standby (blue)
10/31/2014
15 MPH
Error Screens
IMPORTANT: The OnGuard collision safety system is not operational when an error screen is
displayed. If a fault occurs or OnGuard fails to
properly track a vehicle, take the vehicle in for
service as soon as possible. Standard cruise
control will not function with an active OnGuard
system fault.
If a system fault is detected, the OnGuard display
unit will immediately display an error screen as
shown in Fig. 5.8. The first error code transmitted
will be displayed first; additional faults (if any) can be
viewed using the up or down buttons. The display
does not show stored fault codes.
Refer to the OnGuard Collision Safety System Maintenance Manual MM-0951 for a full list of faults
(www.meritorwabco.com).
Driver Assistance Features
• brake pedal position
DATA ERROR
COMPONENT TEST
Brake Pedal Position
37%
ON
EBS Brake Switch
ACC1 Link Error
10/31/2014
CCVS Brake Switch
f611148
Fig. 5.8, OnGuard Error Screen (amber)
ON
10/31/2014
f611151
Fig. 5.10, Component Test Menu
Additional Features
Press the MODE button to access the OnGuard display unit additional features from the CMS or ACC
main operating screen. Press the up and down arrows to scroll through each menu, then press the
MODE button to select the value to be changed. In
edit mode, press the up or down arrows to change a
value setting, then press the MODE button to save
the setting. Pressing MODE in each feature screen
advances the display to the next feature.
The Display Control menu allows adjustment of the
alarm volume, LCD brightness, LCD contrast, and
U.S./metric unit conversion. See Fig. 5.9.
• EBS brake switch
• CCVS brake switch
• clutch switch
• park brake switch
• accelerator pedal position
• driveline engaged
• cruise control enable
• cruise control set speed switch
• cruise control coast switch
• cruise control resume switch
DISPLAY CONTROL
Alarm Volume
• cruise control accelerate switch
• cruise control pause switch
10
Alarm Tone
4
LCD Intensity
9
10/31/2014
Lane Departure Warning
Controls
f611149
Fig. 5.9, Display Control Menu
The component test menu provides verification of
system component operation and acts as a valuable
OnGuard system diagnostic tool. The header will display either COMPONENT TEST or ACC FUNCTION,
depending on the software release version of the OnGuard system. The component test screen shown in
Fig. 5.10 provides access to the following components (press the up or down arrows to scroll through
the menu):
The lane departure warning system monitors the vehicle’s position within the roadway lane markings and
sounds a warning in the cab when the vehicle is
about to stray outside its lane, provided the turn signal is not on and the vehicle is traveling at least 37
mph (60 km/h). The system includes a digital camera
mounted high near the center of the windshield inside the cab and speakers that emit a sound similar
to a rumble strip. The sound is made on the side of
the vehicle it’s straying toward, prompting the driver
to respond and steer away from the sound and back
into the center of the correct lane.
5.4
Driver Assistance Features
WARNING
The lane departure warning system is intended
only as an aid for a conscientious and alert
driver. The system may not indicate lane departures under certain conditions. Read the information in this manual to understand the circumstances under which this system may not
provide adequate lane departure warnings. Do
not rely solely on the system to safely operate
the vehicle. The system does not warn of all possible hazards. For example, the system cannot
prevent an accident if the driver is impaired or
not driving safely.
When the vehicle approaches the lane markings on
either side, the system sense the activation of a turn
signal. If a turn signal has not been activated, the
system initiates the audible warning to alert the driver
that the vehicle is departing its current lane of travel.
The LANE SRCHNG warning light illuminates to indicate the system is not fully functional. When the
warning light is on, the system audible alert may not
indicate a lane departure. Conditions that can cause
the warning light to illuminate include:
• The system is unable to detect lane markings.
• Vehicle speed is less than 37 mph (60 km/h).
• A system problem is detected.
The lane departure warning system is not a substitute for safe driving procedures.
Roll Stability System
Failure to drive safely and use the system properly could result in personal injury and/or death
and severe property damage.
The roll stability system may include the roll stability
advisor (RSA) only, or it may also include the roll stability control (RSC).
The lane departure warning system powers up each
time the ignition is turned to ON. The system conducts a self test, and initiates test tones from the left
speaker and then the right speaker. Once the vehicle
is started and the system is ready, the LED in the
switch illuminates.
A decal (Fig. 5.12) on the auxiliary dash panel, and
an amber-colored dash indicator light (Fig. 5.13), indicate that the vehicle is equipped with roll stability
system components.
Press the LANE ALERT switch to temporarily disable
the lane departure warning system. See Fig. 5.11.
Some vehicles are equipped with a timer that automatically re-enables the warning system after 15
minutes. On all other vehicles, the warning system
will remain disabled until the driver enables the system by pressing the LANE ALERT switch again, or
the ignition is cycled off and then on.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
lamp indicates traction
OR roll control event.
Follow instructions in
driver’s manual.
24−01204−000
07/11/2003
f080125
Fig. 5.12, Roll Stability Decal
LANE
ALERT
08/07/2014
f611266
Fig. 5.11, Lane Departure Warning System Disable
Switch
06/26/2003
Fig. 5.13, Roll Stability Indicator Lamp
5.5
f602128
Driver Assistance Features
Roll Stability Advisor
MSG
Message
Message to Display
No.
IMPORTANT: This is not an advance warning
system. The roll stability advisor displays a message only after the driving maneuver is completed.
The roll stability system uses a lateral-acceleration
sensor that monitors rollover risk. Shortly after a
curve, lane change, or other driving maneuver that
results in a rollover-risk detection, a dash warning
light illuminates, an audible tone sounds, and a driver
advisory message is displayed in the driver message
center. The purpose is to advise the driver that the
previous maneuver produced a rollover risk.
The roll stability advisor displays different text messages depending on the severity of the risk of each
occurrence of risky driving. From the highest risk
level to the lowest risk level, the system will sound
an audible alert, and display a message, as shown in
Fig. 5.14.
NOTE: The system will calculate and recommend a speed reduction value. It may be different than the values shown here.
1
System Fault
WARNING
Display Buzzer
Time:
Time:
Seconds Seconds
4
1
4
None
19.6
10
14
5
8.4
2
14
0.5
14
0.5
14
0.5
RAC SYSTEM FAIL
2
RSC
ACTIVE SLOWING
ROLLOVER RISK
3
RSA Level 3
VERY HIGH RISK OF
ROLLOVER DETECTED
REDUCE SPEED
AT LEAST 7 MPH
or in metric
REDUCE SPEED
AT LEAST 11 KPH
4
RSA Level 2
HIGH RISK OF
ROLLOVER DETECTED
REDUCE SPEED
AT LEAST 7 MPH
or in metric
REDUCE SPEED
AT LEAST 11 KPH
5
RSA Level 1
ROLLOVER RISK
DETECTED
Bring the vehicle to an authorized service facility if a
system failure message is displayed.
REDUCE SPEED
AT LEAST 7 MPH
Roll Stability Control
or in metric
REDUCE SPEED
WARNING
AT LEAST 11 KPH
6
The Roll Stability Control system is intended only
as an aid for a conscientious and alert driver.
Carefully read the information in this manual to
understand this system and its limitations. The
Roll Stability Control system is not a substitute
for safe driving procedures. Failure to drive
safely, and use the system properly, could result
in personal injury and/or death and property
damage.
The roll stability control system automatically reduces
engine power, applies the engine brake, and/or applies the tractor and trailer brakes when the acceleration sensor detects that the vehicle is at risk of rolling
over. The control can intervene even before an advisory message is displayed.
HBED Level 3
HARD BRAKING WITH
ABS ACTIVATED
LOOK AHEAD
BRAKE SOONER
7
HBED Level 2
HARD BRAKING
DETECTED
LOOK AHEAD
BRAKE SOONER
8
HBED Level 1
LOSS OF TRACTION
ABS ACTIVATED
ROAD SURFACE
MAY BE POOR
07/25/2008
f040769
Fig. 5.14, Roll Stability and Hard-Braking Warnings
The dash indicator light illuminates whenever the roll
stability control system intervenes.
5.6
Driver Assistance Features
Hard-Braking Advisor
The hard-braking advisor uses the information from
the ABS wheel speed sensors to determine when
braking is severe enough to produce lockup at one
or more wheels on the tractor, and/or very rapid vehicle deceleration. Shortly after a hard-braking event
occurs, an advisory message is displayed in the
driver message center, indicating that the braking
behavior was too aggressive for the current road surface conditions. This system is not a replacement for
a driver’s good judgment. Sometimes it is necessary
to brake hard.
From the highest risk level to the lowest risk level,
the system will sound an audible alert, and display a
message, as shown in Fig. 5.14.
TRIP ADVISORIES
237 ROLL
A B C
518 BRK
D
E
F
07/25/2008
f040770
A. RSA lev. 3 Count (2)
B. RSA lev. 2 Count (3)
C. RSA lev. 1 Count (7)
D. HBED lev. 3 Count (5)
E. HBED lev. 2 Count (1)
F. HBED lev. 1 Count (8)
Fig. 5.15, Trip Advisor Message Screen
If the count reaches more than 9 occurrences an uparrow symbol will appear, to indicate to the driver
that the count has exceeded 9 counts. See
Fig. 5.16.
Trip/Leg Totals
The driver message center records the number of
messages received, and displays the number of
messages as counts. Roll stability advisor (RSA) and
hard-braking event data (HBED) counts can be
viewed in the trip advisory screen, and the leg advisory screen.
Counts can be reset using the + key on the steering
wheel. Clearing RSA and HBED leg counts will also
reset the leg miles and leg hours. Clearing RSA and
HBED trip counts will also reset trip miles, trip hours,
leg miles, leg hours, and leg advisory counts. In addition, resetting leg miles will clear leg counts. Clearing trip miles will reset miles, hours, and counts in
both the leg and trip screens.
The TRIP and LEG advisor screens count both the
roll stability advisories (ROLL) and hard-braking
events (BRK). For example, if during a TRIP, the
driver message center recorded the events in
Table 5.2, the message center would display as
shown in Fig. 5.15.
RSA/HBED Count
Message Received
Message Counts
RSA Level 3
2
RSA Level 2
3
RSA Level 1
7
HBED Level 3
5
HBED Level 2
1
HBED Level 1
8
Table 5.2, RSA/HBED Count
5.7
TRIP ADVISORIES
23 ROLL
518 BRK
A
07/25/2008
f040771
A. RSA Lev. 1 has more than 9 counts.
Fig. 5.16, Trip Advisor Message Screen (more than 9
counts)
Enhanced Stability Control
WARNING
Enhance Stability Control (ESC) is intended only
as an aid for a conscientious and alert driver.
Carefully read the information in this manual to
understand this system and its limitations. ESC
is not a substitute for safe driving procedures.
Failure to drive safely, and use the system properly, could result in personal injury and/or death
and property damage.
ESC offers the full capability of RSC (shown above)
with the added capability of complete directional stability (yaw control) in oversteer and understeer conditions to reduce the likelihood of drift-out or jackknife.
The system determines where the driver is attempting to steer the vehicle and how much brake demand
is required in order to more precisely control the vehicle in an emergency situation.
Driver Assistance Features
ESC works by constantly comparing the driver input
with the vehicle’s actual behavior. The system does
this by monitoring systems such as wheel speed,
steering angle, yaw rate, lateral acceleration, throttle
position, and brake application. A central microcomputer analyzes the collected data and triggers a response to keep the vehicle on course when an unstable condition is detected.
When the system detects that the vehicle is at risk of
oversteering or understeering, it applies individual
tractor wheel end brakes and trailer brakes, activates
the engine retarder (if equipped), and/or cuts engine
power, depending on the severity. As a result, the
driver has full control over the vehicle until the system detects a potential risk and intervenes accordingly. ESC operates automatically; the driver does
not monitor or activate the system.
5.8
6
Climate Controls
Climate Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cab Climate Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sleeper Climate Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parked HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessory Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1
6.1
6.4
6.7
6.8
Climate Controls
Climate Control Options
system in the automatic fan speed control mode.
When the fan switch is set to AUTO, the fan speed
will vary as necessary to maintain the temperature
set by the user.
The climate control panel allows you to control the
heating, ventilating, defrosting, and air conditioning
functions. Western Star vehicles have several heater
and air conditioner options.
Temperature Control Switch
Options for the cab include:
To select the desired temperature:
• heater and air conditioner
• heater and air conditioner with automatic tem-
perature control (ATC)
Options for a sleeper unit include:
• no heater or air conditioner
• heater only
• heater and air conditioner
• heater and air conditioner with ATC
The ATC feature automatically controls the heating
and cooling system to maintain the cab and sleeper
air temperature close to the temperature set by the
user. The ATC adjusts the air temperature blown
through the air outlets to maintain the selected temperature.
Cab Climate Control Panels
The standard cab climate control panel has a fan
switch, a temperature control switch, and a mode
control switch that allows the driver to control heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilating. The control
panel may also be equipped with an optional A/C
switch and/or an optional BUNK switch. See Fig. 6.1.
Vehicles equipped with ATC have an LED display.
See Fig. 6.2.
Controls
Fan Switch
The fan switch activates the fan, which forces fresh
air or recirculated air through the air outlets. The fan
switch has four fan speed settings and an off position. See Fig. 6.1.
To operate the fan switch, turn the fan switch clockwise to increase airflow; turn the fan switch counterclockwise to decrease airflow.
On vehicles equipped with ATC, the AUTO setting on
the fan switch places the heater and air conditioner
6.1
• Vehicles Without ATC: Turn the switch to the
left (counterclockwise) for cool air, or to the
right (clockwise) for hot air.
• Vehicles With ATC: Press and release the right
side of the temperature up/down switch to increase the temperature to the desired setting.
Press and release the left side of the temperature up/down switch to decrease the temperature to the desired setting. Press and hold the
temperature up/down switch to change the desired temperature in large increments.
Mode Control Switch
The mode control switch allows the driver to control
the flow of air through the face outlets, the floor outlets, the defrost (windshield) outlets, or a combination
of these outlets to provide six air selection modes.
See Fig. 6.3.
• Face Mode (using recirculating air): Directs all
airflow through the face or instrument panel
outlets, using recirculated air.
• Face Mode (using fresh air): Directs all airflow
through the face or instrument panel outlets,
using fresh air.
• Bi-Level Mode: Directs the airflow equally to
the face outlets and the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode: Directs all airflow through the floor
outlets.
• Floor/Defrost Mode: Directs the airflow equally
to the floor outlets and the defrost outlets.
• Defrost Mode: Directs all airflow through the
defrost outlets.
NOTE: The face mode using recirculating air is
the only mode that recirculates the air in the
cab. All other modes draw in fresh air from outside the vehicle.
Climate Controls
2
3
4
1
BUNK
02/10/2003
1. Fan Off Position
2. Fan Switch
3. Temperature Control Switch
A/C
7
6
4. Mode Control Switch
5. Air Conditioner Switch
f610640
5
6. Bunk Switch
7. Indicator
Fig. 6.1, Cab Climate Control Panel, No ATC
2
Automatic Temperature Control
3
1
6
4
5
f610628
12/13/2002
1. Fan Off Position
2. LED Display
3. Mode Control Switch
4. Bunk Switch (optional)
5. Temperature Up/Down Switch
6. Fan Switch
Fig. 6.2, Cab Climate Control Panel With ATC
Bunk Switch
The optional BUNK switch allows the driver to control
the sleeper heater and air conditioner from the cab.
Press the BUNK switch to turn the sleeper heater
and air conditioner on. When the bunk switch is on,
the indicator light is on. The sleeper heater and air
conditioner can still be controlled from the sleeper
when the BUNK switch is on.
Air Conditioner (A/C) Switch
The air conditioner cools and dehumidifies the air
inside the cab. Press the optional A/C switch to turn
6.2
Climate Controls
3
4
ing the right side of the temperature up/down switch
for five seconds. The current error status will be
shown on the LED display. Press the right side of the
temperature up/down switch again repeatedly to
scroll the display through any existing error codes. If
an error code is displayed, contact your Western Star
dealer for service.
5
2
6
1
Modes
Recirculation Mode
02/06/2003
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fig. 6.3, Mode Control Switch Settings
the air conditioner on or off. When the air conditioner
is on, the A/C switch illuminates.
IMPORTANT: Operate the air conditioner at
least five minutes each month, even during cool
weather. This helps prevent drying and cracking
of the refrigerant compressor seals and reduces
the chance of refrigerant leaks in the system.
LED Display, Vehicles With ATC Only
The LED display shows the temperature to which the
heater or air conditioner has been set in degrees
Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius.
Changing Temperature Units
The temperature units can be changed from Fahrenheit (°F) to Celsius (°C) or from Celsius to Fahrenheit
by turning the ignition on, turning the fan switch off,
and pressing and holding the left side of the temperature up/down switch for five seconds. The current temperature unit will then be shown on the LED
display. Press the left side of the temperature up/
down switch again to toggle between °F and °C.
Changing the temperature units on the cab climate
control panel will also effect the sleeper climate control panel.
Error Codes
Error codes can be displayed by turning the ignition
on, turning the fan switch off, and pressing and hold-
6.3
WARNING
f610641
Face Mode (recirculating air)
Face Mode (fresh air)
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Floor and Defrost Mode
Defrost Mode
Do not use the recirculation mode when the
heater is on and the vehicle is in motion. Driving
with the recirculation mode on while the heater is
on may cause the windows to be obscured by
moisture or ice, which could result in an accident
possibly causing personal injury or property
damage.
Do not use the recirculation mode for more than
20 minutes at a time because the air inside the
cab may become stuffy and the windows may
become obscured by moisture, which could result in an accident possibly causing personal injury or property damage.
When the mode control switch (see Fig. 6.3) is
turned to the face mode using recirculating air, the
air in the cab is recirculated through the heater and
air conditioner system. This is the only mode that
uses recirculated air. Fresh air, or outside air, is circulated through the heating and air conditioning system when any other mode is selected.
The recirculation mode can be used to prevent dusty
or smoky air from entering the cab, or to decrease
the time required to cool or heat the cab interior during extreme outside temperature conditions. When
the outside air is clear or the desired cab temperature is reached, change the mode control switch to a
fresh-air mode. The recirculation mode can be used
when the air conditioner is on whether the vehicle is
moving or not.
Defrost Mode
The defrost mode is used to deice, defrost, or defog
the windows.
NOTE: When the defrost mode is on, the air
conditioner is on. The air conditioner is used to
Climate Controls
dehumidify the air entering the cab and to remove the moisture from the windshield.
Temperature Control Switch
Sleeper Climate Control Panels
The standard sleeper climate control panel has a fan
switch, a temperature control switch, and a power
switch that allow you to control the heating and air
conditioning functions in the sleeper. A vehicle with
an air conditioner has an air conditioner switch on
the control panel. See Fig. 6.4.
Vehicles with ATC have button controls instead of
switch controls. See Fig. 6.5.
To select the desired temperature, turn the switch to
the left (counterclockwise) for cool air, or to the right
(clockwise) for hot air.
Air Conditioner (A/C) Switch
The air conditioner cools and dehumidifies the air
inside the sleeper. Press the optional A/C switch to
turn the air conditioner on or off.
Controls, Vehicles With ATC
Controls, Vehicles Without ATC
The controls for the sleeper heater and air conditioner are located on the right side of the ATC
sleeper control panel. See Fig. 6.5.
Power Switch and Indicator
Power Switch and Indicator
The power switch is used to turn the sleeper heater
and air conditioner on and off. When the heater or air
conditioner is on, the indicator illuminates.
Fan Switch
The fan switch controls the fan speed and forces air
through the air outlets. The fan switch has three
speed settings and an off position. See Fig. 6.4.
To operate the fan switch, turn the switch clockwise
to increase airflow; turn the fan switch counterclockwise to decrease airflow.
1
Turn the sleeper heater and air conditioner on by
pressing the ON button. The current set temperature
is displayed for five seconds, after which it returns to
the time display. When the heater or air conditioner
is on, the indicator illuminates. To turn the sleeper
heater and air conditioner off, press the OFF button.
Fan Switch
To operate the fan switch, press the fan up or fan
down button repeatedly to incrementally increase or
decrease the fan speed. Press either button for at
3
2
POWER
A/C
02/04/2015
1. Fan Switch
2. Power Switch
5
HEAT
4
3. Indicator
4. Temperature Control Switch
f610642a
5. Air Conditioner Switch
Fig. 6.4, Sleeper Climate Control Panel, No ATC
6.4
Climate Controls
2
3
4
5
6
ON
PM
ALARM
TIME
OFF
SET +
AUTO
1
7
DISP
SET −
Automatic Temperature Control
01/14/2003
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
10
Alarm Button
Time Button
Fan Up Button
Heater and Air Conditioner On Button
Heater and Air Conditioner Off Button
9
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
8
f610629
Temperature Up Button
Temperature Down Button
Automatic Fan Button
Fan Down Button
Display Button
Fig. 6.5, Sleeper Climate Control Panel With ATC
least two seconds to continuously increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan speed setting is displayed on the sleeper control panel in 10 percent
increments. When the highest or lowest fan speed is
selected, HI or LO is displayed. The display returns
to the time display five seconds after a fan up/down
button is pressed and released.
In the ATC mode, fan speed is determined by the
system as required. The fan speed is based on the
difference between the set point temperature and the
actual sleeper cab temperature. The greater the difference, the greater the fan speed. The AUTO fan
function is disabled when either the fan up or fan
down button is pressed.
Temperature Control Switch
Temperature is displayed with a three-digit annotation
and can be displayed either in degrees Celsius or
degrees Fahrenheit. A capital "C" or "F" is displayed
for the appropriate temperature scale.
To select the desired temperature, press the temperature up or temperature down button repeatedly
to incrementally increase or decrease the set temperature. Press either button for at least two seconds
to continuously increase or decrease the set tem-
6.5
perature. The temperature setting is displayed on the
sleeper control panel. The display returns to the time
display five seconds after a temperature up/down
button is pressed and released.
The temperature units can be changed from °F to °C
or from °C to °F by pressing the temperature up and
temperature down buttons simultaneously. Changing
the temperature units on the ATC sleeper control
panel will also change the temperature units on the
ATC cab control panel.
Auto Button
Press the AUTO button to enable automatic control
of the fan speed. The display will show the current
set temperature for five seconds, then return to the
time display. When in the automatic mode, the fan
speed can vary to maintain the temperature set by
the user. When automatic control is turned on, the
indicator above the AUTO button illuminates.
Alarm Button
Momentarily press the ALARM button to turn the
alarm on and to illuminate the alarm indicator above
the ALARM button. Momentarily press the button
again to deactivate the alarm.
Climate Controls
When pressing the ALARM button, the display shows
the alarm time setting for five seconds before returning to the current time display. If the ALARM button
is pressed and held down continuously for more than
one second, the alarm time setting can be viewed
without changing the state of the alarm indicator. If
either the SET+ or SET– buttons are pressed simultaneously with the ALARM button held down, the
alarm time setting will increase or decrease. When
the ALARM button is released after changing the
alarm time, the alarm will be turned on and the indicator will be illuminated. When the ALARM is sounding, press the ALARM button to turn the alarm off
and to reset the alarm for the next 24-hour cycle.
To set the snooze function, press any button on the
control panel, except the ALARM button, when the
alarm is sounding. The alarm will sound again after
seven minutes. The alarm indicator flashes when the
snooze function is set.
be off. All clock functions, including the alarm, will
continue to work internally.
Temperature Slave Mode Feature
The temperature slave mode allows the set temperature of the cab heater and air conditioner to be automatically tied to the sleeper heater and air conditioner. In this mode, the set temperature in the
vehicle will be the same whether the set temperature
is changed on the cab climate control panel or the
sleeper climate control panel. To enable the temperature slave mode, press the SET+ and SET– buttons
simultaneously. The display will read S–ON when the
temperature slave mode is enabled.
Time Button
To disable the temperature slave mode, press the
SET+ and SET– buttons simultaneously. The display
will read S–OFF indicating that the temperature slave
mode is disabled. When disabled, the temperatures
for the cab and sleeper can be changed independently for separate temperature control. If you wish
to maintain a temperature in the sleeper that is different than the temperature in the front of the cab, it is
recommended that a curtain be used between the
sleeper and the front of the cab.
The clock controls are located on the left side of the
ATC sleeper control panel under the display. The display will show the clock time as the default mode.
Turning on the Sleeper Air Conditioner
When the Cab Air Conditioner is Off
Press the TIME button to display the current time. If
the TIME button is held down and either the SET+ or
SET– buttons are pressed simultaneously with the
TIME button, the clock setting will increase or decrease.
The sleeper ATC control panel can turn on the air
conditioner even if the cab HVAC unit is turned off
but the engine is running. By pressing the ON button,
the ATC sleeper control panel will turn on the cab
unit and the bunk indicator light on the cab control
panel will be illuminated. If cooling is needed in the
sleeper, the cab HVAC unit will switch on to a low
blower fan setting and the A/C compressor clutch will
engage. If cooling is no longer required in the
sleeper or if heat is needed, the cab unit fan and the
compressor clutch will be turned off after a fiveminute delay.
To cancel the snooze function, press the ALARM button. This will also reset the alarm for the next 24hour cycle.
Display Button
Press the DISP button to allow the display and illumination of the control panel to scroll through three illumination levels: bright, dim, and off. If you want the
alarm, time, or temperature setting to be displayed
when the display is in the off mode, press the
ALARM, TIME, or temperature up/down buttons to
display the corresponding display for five seconds.
After five seconds, the display will turn off. If the
alarm sounds while in the display off mode, the current time will be displayed simultaneously. The display will remain on for five minutes, then turn off.
When the vehicle ignition is not powered, the sleeper
climate control panel is in a power-saving mode and
the display and illumination of the control panel will
Accessory Heaters
Optional accessary heaters are available from the
factory in several configurations. Familiarize yourself
with the equipment on your specific vehicle, and follow the manufacturer’s operating and maintenance
instructions.
6.6
Climate Controls
WARNING
WARNING
Do not operate fuel-operated heaters in an area
where flammable vapors, including gasoline or
diesel fumes, are present, such as at filling stations and tank farms. Turn off a fuel-operated
heater and allow it shut down completely before
entering an area where flammable gases or liquids are present. Heaters continue to operate for
up to three minutes after being turned off.
Do not operate fuel-operated heaters in an area
where flammable vapors, including gasoline or
diesel fumes, are present, such as at filling stations and tank farms. Turn off a fuel-operated
heater and allow it shut down completely before
entering an area where flammable gases or liquids are present. Heaters continue to operate for
up to three minutes after being turned off.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause
an explosion or fire, resulting in serious property
damage, and personal injury or death.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause
an explosion or fire, resulting in serious property
damage, and personal injury or death.
Parked HVAC
IMPORTANT: Blocked vents will hamper the operation of the unit. Keep the area around the air
intake grilles clear of objects that may block air
flow, or emit objectionable odors into the HVAC
system.
The Bergstrom NITE parked HVAC system consists
of a compact electrical 3000-BTU air-conditioning
system, and a diesel-fired heater unit. It is completely
self-contained, and runs on 12-volt deep-cycle batteries located between the frame rails. The parked
HVAC batteries are isolated from the vehicle-starting
batteries, to prevent the starting batteries from being
drawn down during HVAC operation.
The A/C system is designed to maintain cool air in
the sleeper interior without having the engine running. However, the parked A/C unit will not cool down
a hot sleeper that has been sitting in the sun without
the vehicle A/C running. If the interior temperature is
higher than desired, start the engine and run the vehicle A/C system until the desired sleeper temperature is achieved. This will help cool the sleeper to a
temperature that the parked A/C system can maintain. For optimal operation, the curtain between the
cab and the sleeper should be closed when using
the Parked HVAC A/C system.
The A/C unit is located under the lower bunk in the
sleeper compartment, and intakes air through a grille
located on the front panel of the lower bunk. The outlet ducting runs from the left side of the unit to an
outlet on the back wall of the sleeper.
The heater unit is located next to the A/C unit. It intakes air through a grille located on the right side of
the front panel of the lower bunk. The outlet ducting
runs from the back of the unit to a grille on the left
side of the front panel of the lower bunk.
Parked-HVAC Controls
The control panel for the parked HVAC is located on
the left side of the rear wall, in the sleeper. It has a
temperature-control dial, and a 4-position mode
switch. Turn the temperature-control dial to the left
for cooling, and to the right for heat. See Fig. 6.6.
See Table 6.1 for a description of the mode functions.
After using the system, turn the mode switch to the
OFF position, even if the unit is not running, or the
batteries may not charge properly.
Parked-HVAC Mode Operation
Function
Turns the unit OFF.
Allows the unit to automatically heat or
cool the sleeper, depending on the
temperature setting and the sleeper
AUTO
temperature. Adjusts the compressor,
heater, and fans to keep temperature
constant.
Allows only the heat portion of the system
Heat Only to run. Adjusts the heater only to keep the
temperature constant.
Allows only the A/C portion of the system
A/C Only
to run. Adjusts compressor and fans only
to keep the temperature constant.
Mode
OFF
Table 6.1, Parked-HVAC Mode Operation
6.7
Climate Controls
NOTICE
Always ensure that air inlet and outlet grilles are
not restricted. Restriction of any air inlet or outlet
ports could result in damage to the auxiliary
heater.
1
IMPORTANT: To maintain reliable performance,
run the accessory heater for at least 15 minutes
every month to prevent fuel from degrading.
2
3
Accessory heaters function when the ignition switch
is in the off position and the cab load disconnect
switch is on, if equipped.
4
5
IMPORTANT: Wait three minutes after shutting
down an accessory heater before turning the
cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) to OFF.
AUTO
6
08/29/2007
f831760
1. Temperature-Control
Dial
2. Mode Switch
3. A/C Only
4. Heat Only
5. AUTO
6. OFF
Fig. 6.6, Parked-HVAC Control Panel
Accessory Heaters
Optional accessary heaters are available from the
factory in several configurations. Familiarize yourself
with the equipment on your specific vehicle, and follow the manufacturer’s operating and maintenance
instructions.
WARNING
Do not operate fuel-operated heaters in an area
where flammable vapors, including gasoline or
diesel fumes, are present, such as at filling stations and tank farms. Turn off a fuel-operated
heater and allow it shut down completely before
entering an area where flammable gases or liquids are present. Heaters continue to operate for
up to three minutes after being turned off.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause
an explosion or fire, resulting in serious property
damage, and personal injury or death.
NOTE: The low voltage disconnect (LVD) control
prevents a heater from draining the batteries
below starting voltage.
Espar Heater
Refer to the Espar website, www.espar.com, for additional information.
Espar Mini-Controller
To turn the heat on, press the heat button. See
Fig. 6.7. The red indicator will illuminate when heat
mode is activated. Adjust the desired temperature
with the control knob; rotate the temperature control
knob clockwise for warmer air, or counterclockwise
for cooler air. To turn the heat off, press the off
button.
To turn the fan on, press the fan button. The blue
indicator will illuminate when ventilation mode is activated. To turn the fan off, press the off button.
Espar Digi-Controller
Vehicles built after December 8, 2011 with the DigiController and D2 air heaters are equipped with an
internal LVD in the Digi-Controller that prevents the
heater from draining battery voltage below 12.0 volts.
To turn heat mode on, press the heat button and the
heater will begin its start-up cycle. See Fig. 6.8. ON
will display briefly followed by the ambient temperature, and the green indicator will illuminate. Ambient
display temperature range is 41°F to 90°F.
6.8
Climate Controls
4
6
5
5
Espar
6
3
7
2
4
1
3
02/06/2012
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
8
02/06/2012
2
1
f611161
Temperature Control Knob
Fan Button
Fan Indicator (blue)
Off Button
Heat Indicator (red)
Heat Button
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
7.
8.
f611160
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Down Arrow Button
Fan Button
Fan Indicator (blue)
Heat Indicator (green)
Heat On/Off Button
Up Arrow Button
Ambient Temperature Display
Fig. 6.7, Espar Mini-Controller
Fig. 6.8, Espar Digi-Controller
To adjust the desired temperature, press the up or
down arrow buttons. The desired temperature will
display briefly, followed by the ambient temperature.
The desired temperature will remain in the modulator
memory when the heater is not in operation. Temperature adjustment range is from 41°F to 90°F.
2
To turn heat mode off, press the heat button again.
The heater will initiate a 3-minute cooling cycle.
To turn the fan on, press and hold the fan button until
the blue indicator illuminates and the display shows
active rotating digits. To turn the fan off, press the
fan button again.
NOTE: The Digi-Controller also has a programmable run timer that will automatically shut the
heater off after the set time limit. The default
time limit setting is 10 hours.
Webasto Heater
To turn the heater on, rotate the heater control knob
clockwise until the indicator light illuminates. See
Fig. 6.9. The Webasto heater requires one to two
minutes to warm up before warm air is delivered.
6.9
1
10/24/2014
f611162
1. Off Position
2. Heater On Indicator Light
Fig. 6.9, Webasto Heater Control Knob
To set the desired temperature, rotate the heater
control knob clockwise for warmer air, or counterclockwise for cooler air.
To turn the heater off, rotate the heater control counterclockwise until it clicks and the indicator light is
extinguished. The heater will initiate a two-minute
cooling cycle.
Climate Controls
Refer to the Webasto website, techwebasto.com,
for additional information.
6.10
7
Seats and Restraints
Seats, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Western Star High-Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sleeper Compartment Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
7.2
7.2
7.6
Seats and Restraints
Seats, General Information
Unless otherwise noted, all seat adjustments should
be made while seated and before the engine is
started.
Due to the maximum adjustability of mid- and highback air suspension seats, it is possible to combine
the seat back recline adjustment and the seat slide
adjustment so that the seat back contacts the backwall. It is the responsibility of the driver to adjust the
seat to prevent damage to the seat and the cab
interior.
1.
Backrest Tilt: This adjustment enables the backrest to pivot forward or backward.
2.
Lumbar Support: Lumbar support changes the
shape of the seat back to give more or less support to the occupant’s lumbar (lower back) area.
This adjustment is either mechanical or air controlled, depending on make and model of the
seat.
3.
Isolator: This feature reduces the amount of road
shock by isolating the occupant from the motion
of the vehicle, and allowing the upper seat to
move in a simple pendulum motion. A lockout
feature is used whenever the isolator is not desired.
4.
Height Adjustment: This adjustment moves the
entire seat up or down. The adjustment is either
manual or air-controlled, depending on the make
of the seat.
5.
Bottom Cushion Angle, or Fore-and-Aft Bottom
Cushion Height: This adjustment enables the occupant to raise or lower the front or back of the
WARNING
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do
so could cause personal injury.
The following is a description of adjustments that can
be made to various Western Star seats. Not all seats
have all of the adjustments listed below. See
Fig. 7.1.
1
3
4
2
8
5
6
7
f910149a
10/26/2000
1.
2.
3.
4.
Backrest Tilt
Lumbar Support
Isolator Feature
Height Adjustment
5. Bottom Cushion Angle (fore-andaft cushion height)
6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide (seat
track adjustment)
Fig. 7.1, General Seat Adjustments
7.1
7. Seat Tilt
8. Headrest Adjustment
Seats and Restraints
then turn the knob forward or rearward to
achieve the desired position.
bottom cushion. This adjustment is easier to perform when all weight is removed from the seat.
6.
Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide, or Seat Track Adjustment: This adjustment moves the entire seat forward or backward on its track.
7.
Heater: To turn on the heat option, press the button. To turn off the heat option, press the button
again.
7.
Seat Tilt: This adjustment allows the seat assembly (back and bottom cushions) to tilt forward or
backward.
8.
8.
Headrest Adjustment: This adjustment changes
the angle of the upper part of the backrest to
provide head and upper back support.
Shock Absorber: To adjust the amount of damping the shock absorber provides, move the lever
up to increase damping; move the lever down to
decrease damping.
9.
Height Adjustment: To raise or lower the height
of the seat, use the height adjustment switch on
the side of the seat.
Western Star High-Back Seat
See Fig. 7.2 for seat adjustment controls. Not all
models of the seat have all the adjustments listed
below.
1.
Rear Cushion Height: To adjust the height of the
rear of the seat cushion, remove your weight
from the seat and turn the rear cushion adjustment knob to one of three positions.
2.
Fore/Aft Isolator: To engage the isolator, turn the
isolator knob rearward to the unlocked position.
Turn the isolator knob forward to the locked position when the isolator feature is not desired.
3.
Front Cushion Height: To adjust the height of the
front of the cushion, remove your weight from the
seat, then turn the adjustment knob toward the
front of the seat (clockwise) to increase cushion
height. To lower the cushion height, turn the adjustment knob toward the rear of the seat (counterclockwise).
4.
Bottom Cushion Extension: To adjust the foreand-aft position of the seat cushion, remove your
weight from the seat, then lift up and pull forward
on the cushion adjustment handle. To return the
cushion to the aft position, lift up and push rearward.
5.
Fore/Aft Seat Slide: To adjust the fore-and-aft
position of the entire seat, move the fore-and-aft
seat adjustment lever to the left and slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Move the lever back to its original position to
lock the seat in place.
6.
Backrest Tilt: To tilt the backrest, lean forward
slightly to remove pressure from the cushion,
10. Lumbar Support: To adjust the lumbar support,
use the lumbar support switches on the side of
the seat.
Seat Belts and Tether Belts
Seat belt assemblies are designed to secure persons
in the vehicle to help reduce the chance of injury or
the amount of injury resulting from accidents or sudden stops. For this reason, Daimler Trucks North
America LLC (DTNA) urges that the driver and all
passengers, regardless of age or physical condition,
use seat belts when riding in the vehicle.
WARNING
Always use the vehicle’s seat belt system when
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so can result
in severe personal injury or death.
Seat belt assemblies in DTNA vehicles meet Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 209, "Type 1" and
"Type 2" requirements.
When transporting a child, always use a child restraint system or the vehicle seat belts as appropriate. To determine whether a child restraint system is
required, review and comply with applicable state
and local laws. Any child restraint used must comply
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213,
"Child Restraint Systems." When providing a child
restraint system, always carefully read and follow all
instructions pertaining to installation and usage for
the child. Make certain the child remains in the restraint system at all times when the vehicle is in
motion.
In addition to seat belt assemblies, tether belts are
installed on suspension-type seats. Tether belts help
7.2
Seats and Restraints
1
6
4
2
10
9
3
5
8
7
07/18/2007
f910576
NOTE: Not all models of the seat have all the adjustment controls shown.
1. Rear Cushion Height Adjustment
Knob
2. Fore/Aft Isolator
3. Front Cushion Height Adjustment
Knob
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bottom Cushion Extension Handle
Fore/Aft Seat Slide Lever
Backrest Tilt Knob
Heater Button
8. Shock Absorber Lever
9. Height Adjustment Switch
10 Lumbar Support Switches
Fig. 7.2, Western Star High-Back Seat
secure the seat to the floor and are intended to restrain the seat and seat belt in case of an accident or
sudden stop.
IMPORTANT: Seat belts have a finite life which
may be much shorter than the life of the vehicle.
Regular inspections and replacement as needed
are the only assurance of adequate seat belt
security over the life of the vehicle.
7.3
Seat Belt Inspection
WARNING
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be replaced before operating the vehicle. Do not attempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
Seats and Restraints
making any modifications to the system, may result in personal injury or death.
Inspect the seat belts and tether belts (if so
equipped).
1.
Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme dirt and
dust, or for severe fading from exposure to sunlight, especially near the buckle latch plate and in
the D-loop guide area.
2.
Check operation of the buckle, latch, Komfort
Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if equipped), web
retractor, and upper seat belt mount on the door
pillar. Check all visible components for wear or
damage.
3.
Check the seat belt and tether belt connection
points and tighten any that are loose.
Seat Belt Operation
Three-Point Seat Belt
f910004a
01/18/95
Fig. 7.3, Fastening the Three-Point Belt
5.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Komfort
Latch or the Sliding Komfort Latch, see the seat
belt operation under the heading Seat Belt With
Komfort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch.
Position the shoulder strap diagonally across
your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if
equipped). The shoulder strap must be centered
on your shoulder and chest, away from your face
and neck. See Fig. 7.4.
WARNING
Wear three-point seat belts only as described
below. Three-point seat belts are designed to be
worn by one person at a time. In case of an accident or sudden stop, personal injury or death
could result from misuse.
Fasten the seat belts before driving. Fastening a
three-point seat belt while driving creates a hazard.
1.
Slowly pull the link end of the three-point seat
belt out of the retractor and pull it across your
lap (from outboard to inboard) far enough to engage the buckle. If the retractor locks too soon,
allow the belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it
out again.
A
B
C
08/09/2010
f910634
A. Correct—Belt is centered shoulder and chest, away
from face and neck.
B. Wrong—Belt must not rub against face or neck.
C. Wrong—Belt must not hang off shoulder.
Fig. 7.4, Proper Shoulder Strap Fit
6.
To unbuckle the seat belt, press the release button on the buckle. See Fig. 7.5.
2.
Fasten the seat belt by pushing the latch into the
buckle. Listen for an audible click. See Fig. 7.3.
NOTE: Make sure the seat belt is completely
retracted when it is not in use.
3.
Tug on the seat belt to make sure it is securely
fastened. If the buckle unlatches, repeat this
step. If the problem continues, replace the seat
belt.
Seat Belt With Komfort Latch or Sliding
Komfort Latch
4.
Snug the seat belt to your waist.
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Komfort Latch or the Sliding Komfort Latch, see the
7.4
Seats and Restraints
B
A
f910049a
01/18/95
Fig. 7.5, Releasing the Three-Point Seat Belt
seat belt operation under the heading ThreePoint Seat Belt.
03/11/2010
f910620
A. Disengaged
WARNING
B. Engaged
Fig. 7.6, Komfort Latch
Wear three-point seat belts only as described
below. Three-point seat belts are designed to be
worn by one person at a time. In case of an accident or sudden stop, personal injury or death
could result from misuse.
Fasten the seat belts before driving. Fastening a
three-point seat belt while driving creates a hazard.
When engaged and used properly, the Komfort Latch
(Fig. 7.6) and the Sliding Komfort Latch (Fig. 7.7)
introduce a small amount of slack into the seat belt,
resulting in a more comfortable ride.
1.
Slowly pull the link end of the seat belt out of the
retractor and pull it across your lap (from outboard to inboard) far enough to engage the
buckle. If the retractor locks too soon, allow the
belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it out
again.
2.
Fasten the seat belt by pushing the latch into the
buckle. Listen for an audible click. See Fig. 7.3.
3.
Tug on the seat belt to make sure it is securely
fastened. If the buckle unlatches, repeat this
step. If the problem continues, replace the seat
belt.
7.5
11/18/2010
f910621a
Fig. 7.7, Sliding Komfort Latch
4.
Snug the seat belt to your waist.
Seats and Restraints
WARNING
Before activating the Komfort Latch or the Sliding Komfort Latch, make sure the amount of
slack in the shoulder strap is set as described
below. Excess slack in the shoulder strap reduces the effectiveness of the seat belt, and increases the risk of injury or death in an accident.
5.
Position the shoulder strap diagonally across
your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if
equipped). The shoulder strap must be centered
on your shoulder and chest, away from your face
and neck. See Fig. 7.4. If desired, engage the
Komfort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch as follows.
If equipped with a Sliding Komfort Latch, make
sure that the shoulder strap is snug against your
chest. Without loosening the shoulder strap,
push the Sliding Komfort Latch switch to the
"ON" position. See Fig. 7.7. To activate the latch
lean forward until you hear a click. This will allow
for approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack between your chest and the shoulder harness.
Once engaged, the latch will allow you to lean
forward about 5 inches (13 cm) without having to
reset the latch. Leaning forward more than 5
inches (13 cm) will disengage the Sliding Komfort Latch, requiring it to be reset.
If equipped with a Komfort Latch, pull on the
shoulder strap to lessen the pressure of the strap
on your shoulder and chest. Allow no more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack between your chest and
the shoulder harness. More slack can significantly reduce the seat belt effectiveness in an
accident or a sudden stop. While holding the belt
slack, press the Komfort Latch lever up, clamping the seat belt webbing (Fig. 7.8 and Fig. 7.9).
6.
Unbuckle the seat belt and release the Komfort
Latch or the Sliding Komfort Latch as follows.
If equipped with a Sliding Komfort Latch, unbuckle the seat belt (Fig. 7.5), then tug on the
shoulder belt to release the Sliding Komfort
Latch, or press the Sliding Komfort latch to the
"OFF" position, then unbuckle the seat belt.
If equipped with a Komfort Latch, unbuckle the
seat belt (Fig. 7.5), then release the Komfort
Latch by giving the shoulder belt a quick tug. If
you lean forward against the shoulder belt, the
A
f910048a
01/06/95
A. 1 Inch (2.5 cm) Maximum
Fig. 7.8, Adjusting Shoulder Harness Clearance,
Komfort Latch
01/06/95
f910006a
Fig. 7.9, Locking the Komfort Latch
Komfort Latch will automatically release, and will
need to be reset.
NOTE: Neither the Komfort Latch nor the Sliding
Komfort Latch need to be manually released in
an emergency situation. Each will release by
itself under rough road or other abnormal conditions. Make sure the seat belt is completely retracted when it is not in use.
Sleeper Compartment
Restraints
On vehicles equipped with a sleeper compartment,
bunk restraints should be used whenever the sleeper
7.6
Seats and Restraints
compartment is occupied and the vehicle is moving.
Restraints are designed to lessen the chance of injury or the amount of injury resulting from accidents
or sudden stops.
Bunk Restraint Adjustment
1.
Make sure the belt is attached to the bunk support and sleeper wall.
2.
To lengthen the belt, tip the link end downward
and pull the link until it connects with the buckle.
3.
After the belt is connected, shorten it by pulling
on the loose end until the belt is snug, but comfortable. Be sure the belts are not twisted. See
Fig. 7.10.
A
1
2
3
f910472
08/18/2011
A. Pull on the loose end to shorten the belt.
1. Belt
3. Release Buckle
2. Connector
Fig. 7.10, Bunk Restraint Adjustment
7.7
8
Cab and Sleeper Features
Windows and Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Sleeper Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Cab and Sleeper Features
Windows and Mirrors
Down-View Mirror
Power Mirrors
A down-view mirror is installed on the door frame to
provide the driver a view of the area adjacent to the
side of the cab. See Fig. 8.3.
The outside mirrors are mounted on the cab. There
is a primary rear view mirror and a convex mirror on
both the driver and passenger sides. The mirrors are
controlled by a switch pad located on the overhead
console. See Fig. 8.1.
2
1
1
08/18/2014
f610523a
1. Mirror Select Switch
2. Keypad
Fig. 8.1, Power Mirror Switch Pad
One or both outside mirrors may be heated to clear
fog, frost, or ice. To defog the mirrors, press the
upper half of the mirror defog switch (MIRROR
DEFOG). See Fig. 8.2. When the mirror defog switch
is on, the status bar illuminates. To turn off heat to
the mirror(s), press the lower half of the switch.
08/18/2014
f602531
1. Down-View Mirror (passenger side shown)
Fig. 8.3, Down-View Mirror
Windows
MIRROR
DEFOG
Power windows are operated by switches (POWER
WINDOW) located on the door. See Fig. 8.4.
To raise the window, press the upper half of the
switch. To lower the window, press the lower half of
the switch.
08/18/2011
f545813
To defog the mirror(s), press the upper half of the switch.
To turn off heat to the mirror(s), press the lower half of
the switch.
Fig. 8.2, Mirror Defog Switch
8.1
Cab Amenities
Western Star vehicles are available with many optional features. The following are some of those
options.
Cab and Sleeper Features
To activate the cigar lighter, push in the element
knob. It will pop out when heated. Grasp the element
knob and pull it out of the socket.
To remove the ash tray, push down on the center
bar, and swing outwards. To install the ash tray, insert in the opening then swing upwards until the bar
snaps into place.
1
Cup Holders
A dual cup holder with a cell phone holder, standard
in the sleeper cab and optional in the day cab, is located below the right-hand dash control panel.
3
2
Glove Box
08/19/2014
f611273
1. Door Lock Switch
2. Right-Hand Power Window Switch
3. Left-Hand Power Window Switch
Fig. 8.4, Door Lock and Power Window Switches
Cigar Lighter/Accessory Plugs
The cigar lighter/accessory plug (Fig. 8.5) is located
on the lower right-hand dash panel, above the ignition switch. The ash tray is located to the left of the
cigar lighter. Optional 12V receptacles may be located on the dash.
1
The glove box (Fig. 8.6) is located on the right side
of the dash face, and is equipped with a lock. To lock
the latch, insert the key in the lock, and turn it 1/2turn clockwise. Remove the key. To unlock the latch,
insert the key in the lock, and turn it 1/2-turn counterclockwise.
The glove box door is hinged at the bottom. To open
the unlocked door, push the button in with your
thumb and pull gently on the tang-style latch. The
door will swing downwards, then stop in the open
position. To close the door, swing it upwards, and put
gentle pressure on the latch. The door will be secured, but not locked.
2
2
1
08/19/2014
1. Glove Box
03/21/2001
f610479
1. Ash Tray
f611272
2. Fuse/Relay Panel
Fig. 8.6, Passenger-Side Dash Panels
2. Cigar Lighter
Fig. 8.5, Ash Tray and Lighter
8.2
Cab and Sleeper Features
Electronic Device Mount
Baggage Compartment Doors
Some vehicles may be equipped with an optional
electronic device mounting station and 12-volt outlet
on the dash. The standard bolt pattern allows the
mounting of a variety of devices including navigation
systems, cell phone holders, portable music players,
and other electronic devices. Mounting systems can
be found at www.ram-mount.com.
To unlock, insert the baggage door key in the lock
and turn counterclockwise 1/4-turn. Push the button,
and the latch will spring open. To lock, press the
latch in, turn the key clockwise 1/4-turn, then remove
the key. If the baggage compartment door is unlocked, it can be opened simply by pushing the
button.
Cab Lighting
Sleeper Lighting
See Chapter 4 for detailed information regarding cab
lighting controls.
The sleeper is equipped with two dome lamps, a
floor courtesy light, and swivel reading lamps. The
baggage compartment is equipped with LH and RH
compartment lights. Depending on vehicle configuration, the sleeper may also be equipped with dome
lamps under the rear shelf, a swivel task lamp
mounted on the cabinet, and a pull-out desk lamp.
See Fig. 8.8.
Storage Areas
There is a storage bin located on the right-hand side
of the overhead console (Fig. 8.7). This storage bin
has an elastic mesh cover to keep objects in place.
Some vehicles have an elastic-topped pouch, located
on the rear cab panel between the seats.
1
2
1
2
4
3
3
f610480
03/21/2001
1. Double Reading Lamp (optional)
2. Storage Bin
3. Single Reading Lamp (optional)
Fig. 8.7, Overhead Console Area
Sleeper Amenities
Western Star sleepers are available with many optional features. The following are some of those
options.
NOTE: See Chapter 6 for detailed information
regarding sleeper climate controls and the digital clock.
8.3
05/19/2015
f602557
1. Dome Lamps
2. Task Lamp
3. Reading Lamp
4. Under-Shelf Dome
Lamps
Fig. 8.8, Sleeper Lighting
Dome Lamps and Sleeper Courtesy Light
The ceiling dome lamps and the floor courtesy light
are operated by the sleeper lights switches on the
sleeper control panel and the dash. The under-shelf
dome lamps are operated by pushing on the lens.
Cab and Sleeper Features
Reading Lamps
The swivel reading lamps are operated with a rocker
switch on the lamp.
Baggage Compartment Lights
The baggage compartment lights are activated by
opening or closing the baggage compartment door,
raising and lowering the bunk, or toggling the switch
on the sleeper control panel (if equipped).
Task Lamp
The task lamp is operated by rotating the end of the
lamp canister.
Sleeper Door
NOTE: The sleeper door is not intended for
entry or exit. The door is intended only as a
convenient means to stow or remove personal
belongings in the sleeper area.
To open the sleeper door, reach behind the latch
cover at the rear upper corner, locate the flat handle,
and push down.
IMPORTANT: The sleeper doors have two-stage
latching. When closing the doors, ensure that
they are completely latched to prevent wind
noise and water intrusion.
Sliding Side Window
The sliding side window is locked with an over-center
toggle lever. When unlocked, the window may be
adjusted to suit.
Vent
The air vent is operated using a simple, over-center
latch. The vent will open in two directions. Push the
knob firmly forward or back to open. The center position is closed.
8.4
9
Electrical System
Vehicle Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Voltage Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inverter/Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1
9.1
9.2
9.2
9.3
Electrical System
• bodybuilder PDM (housing any fuses and re-
Vehicle Power Distribution
There are three standard power distribution modules
(PDMs) on vehicles that are compliant with EPA10
and newer regulations: the dash electrical panel, the
powertrain PDM, and the powernet distribution box
(PNDB). See Fig. 9.1 for the typical location of the
powertrain PDM located in the engine compartment.
lays necessary for customer-installed truck
body equipment)
The main PDMs are located inboard of the
passenger-side glove box. Access to the PDMs is
achieved by removing the four screws that secure
the panel cover. See Fig. 9.2and Fig. 9.3.
IMPORTANT: The cover on the powertrain PDM
unit must be in place to protect against water
splash and dust intrusion.
1
2
08/19/2014
f611272
1. Glove Box
2. PDM Cover Panel
Fig. 9.2, Passenger-Side Dash Panels
1
08/19/2014
f546090
1. Powertrain PDM
Fig. 9.1, Powertrain PDM Location
The powertrain PDM houses many of the fuses and
relays for the engine, transmission, and aftertreatment system (ATS). There is a label on the cover of
the powertrain PDM identifying the fuses and relays.
The PNDB houses up to three MIDI fuses and four
ATO fuses. A label on the cover of the PNDB identifies the fuses.
Vehicles may also be equipped with a secondary
PNDB. The secondary PNDB sources power to any
of the following:
• fleet management communications
• trailer end-of-frame connection
• shore power inverter
9.1
2
1
12/09/2014
1. PDM 1
f546093
2. PDM 2
Fig. 9.3, Main PDMs
Battery Disconnect Switch
Your Western Star vehicle may be equipped with a
cab load disconnect switch (CLDS).
Electrical System
The optional CLDS (Fig. 9.4) is used to minimize
draw on the battery, and should be set to OFF when
the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time.
When the CLDS is set to OFF, it signals the PNDB to
disconnect battery power to the circuits powered by
the MIDI fuses.
The CLDS is mounted on the underdash cover, outboard of the steering column.
08/19/2014
f546091
Fig. 9.4, Cab Load Disconnect Switch
IMPORTANT: The ignition should be turned OFF
before using the CLDS.
Battery Access
The batteries on a Western Star vehicle may be located in a variety of locations, including under the
passenger seat, under the cab, behind the cab, or
under the sleeper bunk, if equipped. Some vehicles
may have two batteries in the step compartments on
both sides of the vehicle.
Low Voltage Disconnect
The Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) system protects
the batteries from excessive discharge by disconnecting certain isolated circuits from battery power
supply if necessary. See Table 9.1. This allows the
batteries to maintain acceptable charge to restart the
vehicle. The LVD is integrated into PDM 1. See
Fig. 9.3.
Isolated Circuits
Function
PDM 1
12V Power Receptacle 1, Dash
12V Power Receptacle 2, Dash
12V Power Receptacle 1, Sleeper
CB Radio
Dome Lamp, Cab, Dome/Reading
Dome Lamp, Sleeper
Dome Lamp, Floor Lamp, Sleeper
Fuel Water Separator Heater Element
Mirror Heat, Driver
Mirror Heat, Hood-Mounted
Spare Power Feed 1
Spare Power Feed 2
Utility Lamp
PDM 2
12V Power Receptacle 2, Sleeper
12V Power Receptacle 3, Sleeper
Air Dryer
Amplifier Power
Sleeper/Cab Auxiliary Heater/Parked
HVAC
Auxillary Circulation Fan, Windshield
Auxilliary/Thermo Coolant Heater
Heated Seat
Navigation System
Optional Switch 1
Optional Switch 2
Optional Switch 3
Optional Switch 4
Optional Switch 5
Optional Switch 6
Optional Switch 7
Optional Switch 8
Optional Switch 9
Optional Switch 10
Radio
Refrigerator
Sleeper HVAC Controller, Wake-Up
Sleeper HVAC Fan Motor
Spare Power Feed 3
Spare Power Feed 4
Key Position
OFF/ACC/IGN*
OFF/ACC/IGN
OFF/ACC/IGN
OFF/ACC/IGN*
OFF/ACC/IGN
OFF/ACC/IGN
OFF/ACC/IGN
IGN
IGN
IGN
IGN
IGN
OFF/ACC/IGN
OFF/ACC/IGN
OFF/ACC/IGN
ACC
ACC
OFF/ACC/IGN*
ACC
OFF/ACC/IGN*
ACC
ACC
OFF/BAT/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
OFF/ACC/IGN†
ACC
OFF/ACC/IGN*
ACC
ACC
ACC
OFF/ACC/IGN
* Option to move fuse to remove the function from the LVD bus.
† Option to move fuse to BAT to remove the function from the LVD bus.
Table 9.1, Isolated Circuits
9.2
Electrical System
If battery voltage drops to the trip point (12.3 or 12.1
volts, determined by the vehicle configuration), the
LVD system implements a shut-down. At 70 seconds
before the disconnect, an alarm beeps and the low
battery indicator light on PDM 1 flashes green. The
alarm beeps again at 9 and 3 seconds before the
disconnect. If no action is taken, the LVD system will
shut off power to the circuits, and a red low battery
indicator remains lighted.
These circuits will remain off until the LVD system
measures 13.0 volts applied to the system, which
can be achieved by starting the engine. After the engine is started, the system will reset.
Vehicles are equipped with an LVD label on the
drivers-side sun visor, indicating the presence of the
system.
Inverter/Charger
The optional Freedom HF Inverter/Charger powers
small appliances and other electric equipment. It is
located in the driver-side luggage compartment. See
Fig. 9.5. The unit has one three-pin GFIC OUT connector, one three-pin GFIC IN connector, and two AC
power outlets.
11/05/2014
f546114
Fig. 9.5, Inverter/Charger
The display on the sleeper control panel provides
information about the operation of the unit. See
Fig. 9.6. Refer to Table 9.2 for details on the display
panel.
1
There are two models available for the Western Star:
• 1000W: 1000 watt, 20-amp
2
7
• 1500W: 1500 watt, 40-amp
DANGER
Do not store gasoline, flammable material, or any
component with a connection to the fuel system
in the storage compartment with the inverter/
charger. The unit contains equipment that may
produce sparks. Storing flammable or electrical
equipment in proximity to the unit could result in
fire or explosion hazards, which could result in
serious injury or death.
9.3
3 4 5 6
11/18/2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power
LED Display
Select
Input Voltage LED
f546067
5. Input Current LED
6. Output Power LED
7. Status LED
Fig. 9.6, Inverter/Charger Display Panel (1000W shown)
Electrical System
Display Panel Functions
Number
Name
Function
Press the power button for one second to turn on the unit.
Press and hold the button for five seconds to enter the feature settings mode, then
press the button to toggle between the following modes:
• Charging Current Setting
1
Power
• Inverter Mode Setting
• Alarm Setting
• Shutdown Setting
• Factory Setting
2
LED Display
Refer to the owner’s manual for more information.
The LED display screen shows status information and fault codes.
The Select button changes the display or settings.
Press the Select button to cycle through the setting options. Press and hold the
Select button for five seconds to save the setting. Refer to the owner’s manual for
more information.
• In "Inverter Mode Setting" press the button to turn the inverter mode ON or
OFF.
3
Select
• With the inverter mode ON, press the button to choose what appears on the
LED display screen: Input Voltage, Input Current, or Output Power. Details are
provided below.
NOTE: The unit is in "Inverter Mode" when shore power is not present and the
unit is using the battery to power the appliances connected to it.
• In an alarm condition, press and hold the button for two seconds to disable or
enable the audible alarm.
4
Input Voltage LED
5
Input Current LED
6
Output Power LED
• In "Charging Current Setting" mode, press the button to select the charger
current.
In inverter mode, when Input Voltage is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
and the display will show the input voltage.
In inverter mode, when Input Current is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
and the display will show the input current.
In inverter mode, when Output Power is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
and the display will show the output power.
9.4
Electrical System
Display Panel Functions
Number
Name
Function
The color of the Status light indicates the unit’s mode of operation:
• Green: Utility (Shore Power Mode)
A solid green light indicates that the battery is fully charged.
A flashing green light indicates that the unit is charging the battery.
• Yellow: Battery (Inverter Mode)
7
Status
A solid yellow light indicates that the unit is using the battery to supply AC
power.
A flashing yellow light indicates that the unit is in inverter mode, but that AC
shore power is detected and is transferring to shore power mode within 20
seconds.
• Red: Fault Condition
The fault status light indicates a fault condition with the unit. Refer to the
owner’s manual for fault code information and troubleshooting procedures.
Table 9.2, Display Panel Functions
For more information about troubleshooting, settings,
and other features, refer to the owner’s manual included with the inverter/charger.
9.5
10
Engine Starting, Operation,
and Shutdown
Engine
Engine
Engine
Engine
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.3
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown
Engine Starting
This engine chapter is to serve as a guide for best
practices only. Each engine model may have operating characteristics that are unique to that particular
engine, and will be documented in the engine manufacturer’s literature. Always refer to specific instructions and recommendations from the engine manufacturer.
NOTE: Before starting the engine, read Chapter 3 for detailed information on how to read the
instruments and see Chapter 4 for detailed information on how to operate the controls. Read
the engine manufacturer’s operating instructions
before starting the engine.
WARNING
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
air inlet opening in the air intake in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury or property
damage.
1.
Before engine start-up, complete the engine pretrip inspection and maintenance procedures in
Chapter 23.
2.
Set the parking brake.
3.
For manual transmissions, place the transmission in neutral and fully depress the clutch pedal.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
For automatic transmissions, put the transmission in neutral. Do depress the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE
If the warning lights stay on, or do not come on
momentarily after turning on the ignition, do not
operate the engine. To do so may result in engine
damage.
4.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The
buzzer will sound for three seconds.
During cold conditions, the START BLOCKED
lamp may illuminate. Wait until the lamp goes out
before turning the ignition key to START.
NOTE: The length of time the START
BLOCKED lamp remains illuminated depends
on the ambient temperature. The lower the am-
10.1
bient temperature, the longer the lamp will be
illuminated.
NOTE: The engine electronics supply the correct amount of fuel for starting the engine. Accelerator pedal pressure is unnecessary and
could interfere with engine starting.
5.
Turn the ignition key to the START position. Do
not depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the key the moment the engine starts.
6.
Apply load gradually during the warm-up period.
NOTICE
Do not rev the engine if the oil pressure gauge
indicates no oil pressure. Shut down the engine
within approximately ten seconds to avoid engine
damage.
7.
Check the oil pressure gauge for any drop in lubricating oil pressure or mechanical malfunction
in the lubricating oil system.
Cold-Weather Starting
See the engine manufacturer’s operation manual for
starting aids that are approved for specific engines.
Starting After Extended Shutdown
Before engine start-up, complete the engine pretrip
inspection and maintenance procedures in Chapter 23.
NOTICE
Failure to eliminate water-diluted lubricating oil
may lead to serious engine damage at startup.
An engine in storage for an extended period of time
(over winter, for example) may accumulate water in
the oil pan through normal condensation of moisture
on the internal surfaces of the engine. Oil diluted by
water cannot provide adequate bearing protection at
start-up. For this reason, change the engine oil and
filters after extended storage.
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown
Engine Operation
Safety and Environmental
Considerations
All engines on Western Star vehicles comply with the
requirements of the Federal (U.S.) Clean Air Act.
Once an engine is placed in service, the responsibility for meeting both state and local regulations is with
the owner/operator.
IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdictional emissions guidelines, vehicles that are
domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may
not have engines and/or emissions aftertreatment systems that are compliant with EPA07,
EPA10, or GHG14 regulations.
NOTICE
It is extremely important that the following guidelines be followed for engines that comply with
EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may
occur to the aftertreatment device, and the warranty may be compromised.
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul-
fur content or less.
• Do not use fuel blended with used engine
lube oil or kerosene.
• Use only engine lube oil with a sulfated ash
level less than 1.0 wt%; currently referred
to as CJ-4 oil.
Adequate maintenance of the engine and the diesel
particulate filter (DPF) are the responsibility of the
owner/operator, and are essential to keep the emission levels low. Good operating practices, regular
maintenance, and correct adjustments are factors
that will help keep emissions within the regulations.
The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning
system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if
the engine malfunctions. If the driver doesn’t understand how the warning system works, an engine
shutdown could occur, causing a safety hazard. See
Chapter 11 for more information.
Engine Break-In
Each engine must pass a full-load operating test on
a dynamometer before shipment, thereby eliminating
the need for a break-in. Before running the engine
for the first time, follow the instructions in the engine
manufacturer’s operation manual specific to your
engine.
Normal Operation
WARNING
Do not operate the engine in an area where flammable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes
are present. Shut off the engine when in an area
where flammable liquids or gases are being
handled. Failure to observe these precautions
could result in serious injury or death.
Every engine has an operating range in which it performs most efficiently. The operating range extends
from maximum torque rpm at the low end, to engine
rated speed at the high end. Most engines deliver
best fuel economy when operated in the low- and
mid-speed segments of the efficiency range and produce maximum horsepower at rated speed, which is
also the recommended maximum speed of the engine. For further engine-specific information, refer to
the engine manufacturer’s operation manual.
Prolonged idling of engines is not recommended, and
is illegal in some states. Idling produces sulfuric acid,
that is absorbed by the lubricating oil, and eats into
bearings, rings, valve stems, and engine surfaces. If
you must idle the engine for cab heat or cooling, use
the high idle function of the cruise control switches.
An idle speed of 900 rpm should be enough to provide cab heat in ambient temperatures that are
above freezing.
If the engine is programmed with the idle shutdown
timer, ninety seconds before the preset shutdown
time, the CHECK engine light will begin to flash at a
rapid rate. If the position of the clutch pedal or service brake changes during this final ninety seconds
the idle shutdown timer will be disabled until reset.
Cold-Weather Operation
Satisfactory performance of a diesel engine operating
in low ambient temperatures requires modification of
the engine, surrounding equipment, operating practices, and maintenance procedures. The lower the
temperature, the greater the amount of modification
required. For service products approved for use in
cold weather for your engine, see the engine manufacturer’s engine operation manual.
10.2
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown
• To improve cab heating while idling in an ex-
If satisfactory engine temperature is not maintained,
maintenance costs will increase due to greater engine wear. If the engine coolant gets too cold, raw
fuel will wash the lubricating oil off the cylinder walls
and dilute the crankcase oil, causing all moving parts
of the engine to suffer from poor lubrication.
If the engine is in good mechanical condition and the
precautions necessary for cold-weather operation are
taken, ordinary cold weather will not cause difficulty
in starting or loss of efficiency.
The following points are important to observe when
operating in cold weather:
tremely cold ambient temperature;
• When the ambient temperature remains below
-22°F (-30°C) and the engine is unable to
maintain a running coolant temperature of
175°F (80°C) during normal over-the-road operation.
Engine Shutdown
1.
• Check for cracks in the batteries, for corrosion
of the terminals, and for tightness of the cable
clamps at the terminals.
• Charge the batteries to full capacity. Replace
damaged batteries.
• If equipped, turn off the load disconnect switch
after the engine is shut down, to prevent battery discharge.
NOTICE
Idle the engine one to two minutes before shutting it down. After hard operation, shutting down
the engine without idling may cause damage to
the turbocharger.
2.
• Have the alternator output checked at an au-
belts.
• Refer to the engine manufacturer’s operation
manual for recommended heaters, lowviscosity lubricating oils, winter-grade fuels,
and approved coolants.
NOTICE
For Detroit engines, use of a winterfront is not
recommended, as it can cause false fault codes
with the engine and aftertreatment system, and
possible emission component failures.
If using a winterfront, leave at least 25% of the grille
opening exposed in sectioned stripes that run perpendicular to the charge-air-cooler tube-flow direction. This assures even cooling across each tube,
and reduces header-to-tube stress, and possible
chance of component failure.
Using a winterfront can cause excessive fan run
time, increased fuel consumption, and failure of the
DEF system heaters to operate correctly, resulting in
fault codes, poor performance, and power reduction.
A winterfront should only be used temporarily in the
following situations:
10.3
Allow the engine to idle one to two minutes before shutting it down.
NOTICE
thorized service provider.
• Check the condition and tension of the drive
With the vehicle stopped, set the parking brake
and place the transmission in neutral.
Except in an emergency, do not shut down the
engine when the coolant temperature is above
194°F (90°C). To do so could damage the engine.
3.
Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the
engine.
Engine Cooling
The cooling system used on all Western Star vehicles is a pressure type system. This raises the
coolant boiling point, permitting higher operating temperatures. The coolant supplied in your vehicle will
be a 50/50 mix of antifreeze and water, giving protection down to –35°F (–37°C). It is recommended that
an antifreeze mixture be used at all times, as, in addition to providing frost protection, it is a more effective coolant, and has a higher boiling point than tap
water.
Over-concentration of antifreeze or coolant conditioner can cause silicate to precipitate out of the
coolant, forming silica gel on cooling system heat
transfer surfaces (fuel coolers, oil coolers, radiators,
and heater cores), resulting in reduced coolant flow
and overheating.
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown
Hard water (with high levels of calcium and magnesium ions) encourages formation of silica gel. Do not
use softened water as the salt used to artificially
soften it is corrosive. Most engine manufacturers prefer the use of distilled or de-ionized water to reduce
the potential and severity of silicate dropouts.
Never exceed a 60/40 antifreeze-to-water ratio. If the
level is low, add a 50/50 antifreeze solution to maintain solution concentrations. Note that checking the
engine coolant level is part of the pretrip inspection.
See Chapter 23 for more information.
10.4
11
Optional Engine Systems
Engine Protection—Warning and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Engine Idle Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Optional Engine Systems
Engine Protection—Warning
and Shutdown
The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning
system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if
necessary. If the driver doesn’t understand how the
warning system works, the driver may not be able to
utilize the advantage of the advance warning system
to pull over appropriately.
The engine will begin a warning and derate and/or
shutdown process if the engine coolant temperature,
coolant level, engine oil pressure, or exhaust aftertreatment system (ATS) reach preset levels. On
some engines, the warning process will begin when
the engine oil temperature, engine coolant temperature, or the intake air temperature reach preset levels. Detroit™ engines may also begin the warning
and shutdown process if water is detected in the fuel.
See the engine manufacturer’s operation manual for
specific details for your vehicle. See Chapter 12 for
the warning and shutdown modes associated with
the ATS.
CHECK
07/09/2009
1
STOP
2
3
f611036
1. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
2. CHECK Engine Lamp
3. STOP Engine Lamp
Fig. 11.1, Engine Warning Lamps
Some vehicles may have a shutdown override
switch, which can be used to momentarily override
the shutdown sequence. This switch resets the shutdown timer, restoring power to the level before the
derate. The switch must be pressed again after five
seconds to obtain a subsequent override. See
Fig. 11.2.
Electronic engine protection can be specified as either SHUTDOWN or WARNING and DERATE.
SHUTDOWN
OVERRIDE
WARNING
When the STOP engine or CHECK engine lamp
illuminates, most engines are programmed to
shut down automatically within 30 seconds. The
driver must immediately move the vehicle to a
safe location at the side of the road to prevent
causing a hazardous situation that could cause
bodily injury, property damage, or severe damage
to the engine.
In SHUTDOWN mode, the red STOP engine lamp
will illuminate when the problem is serious enough to
reduce power or speed. See Fig. 11.1. Engine power
will ramp down, then the engine will shut down if the
problem continues while in derate mode. The driver
has 30 or 60 seconds (depending on the critical fault
type) after the STOP engine lamp illuminates to
move the vehicle safely off the road. If the vehicle
cannot be moved to a safe location within that time,
turn the ignition switch to OFF for at least five seconds, then restart the engine. Repeat this action until
the vehicle is safely off the road.
Do not operate the vehicle further until the problem
causing the shutdown has been corrected.
11.1
08/19/2014
f611274
Fig. 11.2, Shutdown Override Switch
NOTICE
When the derate process begins, immediately get
the vehicle serviced in order to prevent severe
damage to the engine.
Detroit engines may begin a warning and derate process if water is detected in the fuel, or if engine coolant temperature is high. In WARNING and DERATE
mode, the CHECK engine, STOP engine, or MIL
lamp will illuminate to indicate an engine problem
that requires service and the engine controls will
begin a derate of engine output. Continuing to run
the engine while it is in derate mode could cause
severe damage to the engine.
Optional Engine Systems
Engine Idle Limiting
Idle Shutdown Timer
This feature is an optional 1- to 100-minute idle shutdown system. Its purpose is to conserve fuel by
eliminating excessive idling, and allowing a turbocharger cool-down period. Idle shutdown timing and
parameters are programmable. See the engine
manufacturer’s operation manual for specific details
for your vehicle.
Engine power takeoffs (PTO) tap into engine power
to run auxiliary devices, such as hydraulic pumps
that power additional equipment. The following are
general guidelines for operating a PTO.
1.
Set the parking brake and put the transmission in
neutral.
2.
Press the dash PTO switch. Release the switch
when the light begins to blink.
When the light illuminates steadily, the PTO is
engaged and ready to operate. In stationary
mode, the vehicle must remain in neutral with the
parking brake set.
The idle shutdown system requires that the transmission be in neutral with the parking brake set.
California Engine Idle Limiting
In order to meet the California Air Resources Board
(CARB) engine idle limit, vehicles are equipped with
an engine idle shutdown feature. The automatic shutdown feature is required on all California-certified
engines (with the exception of engines used in specific vehicle types that are exempt from the requirement). Owners that wish to have the shutdown feature disabled on vehicles operating in California
should consult with California authorities to determine
if their vehicle qualifies for the exemption.
When the CARB engine idle limiting feature is enabled, the engine will typically shut down after five
minutes of continuous idling with the transmission in
neutral or park, and the parking brake set. It will also
shut down after 15 minutes with the transmission in
neutral or park, and the parking brake off. See the
engine manufacturer’s operation manual for specific
details for your vehicle.
Changing the position of the brake pedal, clutch
pedal, accelerator pedal, shutdown override switch,
or parking brake during the final 30 seconds will
cause the shutdown timer to reset. After an automatic shutdown, the engine may be restarted and
operated normally.
3.
To activate mobile mode, shift from neutral to
reverse, 1st, or 2nd gear. The clutch will open
and the PTO will disengage for a moment.
4.
Touch the accelerator pedal to close the clutch
and engage the PTO in mobile mode. The PTO
may be operated with the transmission in neutral
or reverse, and 1st and 2nd gears only.
NOTE: Do not attempt to change gears while
the vehicle is moving. The transmission will ignore the request.
5.
To deactivate mobile mode, bring the vehicle to a
stop. The clutch will open and shut down power
to the PTO.
6.
To resume stationary mode, shift to neutral. The
PTO will engage.
7.
To deactivate PTO, press the PTO switch again.
When the light in the switch goes out, power to
the PTO is shut off.
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor
WARNING
To avoid injury, do not install a PTO that is not
Detroit Diesel approved onto a Detroit™ Transmission. Use of a non-Detroit Diesel approved
PTO with a Detroit Transmission could result in
unintended operation which could lead to severe
personal injury.
11.2
12
Emissions and Fuel
Efficiency
Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Fuel Consumption Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
EPA-Regulated Emissions Aftertreatment Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank, EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
Greenhouse Gas Emissions
and Fuel Consumption
Standards
Vehicles and/or engines manufactured after December 31, 2006 and domiciled in the U.S. or Canada
are required to meet all EPA and NHTSA regulations
effective as of the vehicle build date. Engines manufactured between January 1, 2007 and December 31,
2009 meet EPA07 requirements. Engines manufactured between January 1, 2010 and December 31,
2012 meet EPA10 requirements. Engines manufactured from January 1, 2013 meet NHTSA and EPA
2014 fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emission
standards (GHG14) requirements.
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet additional
requirements as specified by GHG14 requirements.
These vehicles are equipped with components that
increase fuel efficiency and reduce GHG emissions.
Components may include, but are not limited to, lowrolling resistance tires; aerodynamic devices such as
hood, cab/sleeper extenders, and fuel tank fairings;
vehicle speed limiter; and idle shutdown timer. If replacement of any drag-reducing component is required, the replacement component must meet or
exceed the drag reduction performance of the originally installed component in order to maintain compliance with GHG14 requirements.
EPA-Regulated Emissions
Aftertreatment Systems
IMPORTANT: Depending on local jurisdictional
guidelines, vehicles that are domiciled outside of
the U.S. and Canada may not have emissions
aftertreatment systems (ATS) that are compliant
with EPA regulations.
NOTICE
Follow these guidelines for engines that comply
with EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may
occur to the aftertreatment device (ATD) and the
warranty may be compromised.
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul-
fur content or less.
• Do not use fuel blended with used engine
lube oil or kerosene.
12.1
• Engine lube oil must have a sulfated ash
level less than 1.0 wt %; currently referred
to as CJ-4 oil.
IMPORTANT: Using non-specification fuels or
oils can lead to shortened diesel particulate filter
(DPF) cleaning or replacement intervals. For
example, using CJ-4+ oil with 1.3% sulfated ash
(30% more ash content) may result in the need
for DPF cleaning or replacement 20 to 30%
sooner than would normally be required.
IMPORTANT: See the engine manufacturer’s
operation manual for complete details and operation of the ATS.
EPA07 Engines
Engines built between January 1, 2007 and December 31, 2009 are required to meet EPA07 guidelines
for reduced exhaust emissions of particulate matter
and nitrogen oxides (NOx). NOx is limited to just
over 1 gram per brake horsepower hour (g/bhp-hr),
and particulate matter cannot exceed 0.01 g/bhp-hr.
The EPA07 ATS varies according to engine manufacturer and vehicle configuration, but the exhaust muffler is replaced by an aftertreatment device (ATD).
Inside the ATD, the exhaust first passes over the diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC), then passes through
the diesel particulate filter (DPF), which traps soot
particles. The soot is burned to ash during a process
called regeneration (regen).
EPA10 and Newer Engines
The EPA mandates that all engines built after December 31, 2009 must reduce the level of emissions
exhausted by the engine to the following levels:
• Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) – 0.2 g/bhp-hr
• Particulate Matter (PM) – .01 g/bhp-hr
To meet EPA guidelines, engines that are compliant
with EPA10 and newer regulations use an ATS that
has, in addition to a DOC/DPF device like that used
in an EPA07 ATD, a Selective Catalytic Reduction
(SCR) devide to reduce NOx downstream of the engine. After exhaust gases leave the DPF, a controlled
quantity of diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is injected into
the exhaust stream. In the presence of heat, DEF is
converted to ammonia gas, which reacts with NOx in
the selective catalyst chamber to yield nitrogen and
water vapor, which exit through the tailpipe.
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
Regeneration
The harder an engine works, the better it disposes of
soot. If the exhaust temperature is high enough, a
process called passive regeneration (regen) occurs
as the vehicle is driven normally. However, if the engine isn’t running hot enough, the electronic controls
may initiate an active regen, whereby extra fuel is
injected into the exhaust stream to superheat and
reduce the soot trapped in the DPF to ash. Active
regen happens only when the vehicle is moving
above a certain speed, determined by the engine
manufacturer. See your engine operation manual for
complete details. Both active and passive regen happen automatically, without driver input.
WARNING
Active regeneration can occur automatically anytime the vehicle is moving. The exhaust gas temperature could reach 1500°F (800°C), which is hot
enough to cause a fire, heat damage to objects
or materials, or personal injury to persons near
the exhaust outlet. The exhaust temperature can
remain high even after the vehicle has stopped.
When stopping the vehicle shortly after an automatic regen, ensure the exhaust outlets are directed away from structures, trees, vegetation,
flammable materials, and anything else that may
be damaged or injured by exposure to high heat.
See Regen Switches, below, for instructions on
preventing automatic regen if necessary.
When operating conditions do not allow for ATD filter
cleaning by active or passive regen, the vehicle may
require a driver-activated parked regen. When this
occurs, the DPF lamp illuminates, indicating that a
regen is required. The driver must either bring the
vehicle up to highway speed to increase the load
(thus starting an active regen), or park the vehicle
and initiate a parked regen. See Regen Switches,
below, for instructions on initiating a parked regen.
08/07/2014
Some vehicles may be equipped with a regen
request/inhibit switch. See Fig. 12.1, item 2. To stop
2
f611258
1. Regen Request Switch
2. Regen Request/Inhibit Switch
Fig. 12.1, Aftertreatment System Regen Switches
a regen in progress or prevent the start of a regen,
press the lower half of the switch. Regen is then delayed until the switch is no longer active.
NOTE: The regen switch can initiate a parked
regen only when the DPF lamp is illuminated.
WARNING
During parked regen, exhaust temperatures are
very high and could cause a fire, heat damage to
objects or materials, or personal injury to persons near the exhaust outlet.
Before initiating a parked regen, make certain the
exhaust outlets are directed away from structures, trees, vegetation, flammable materials, and
anything else that may be damaged or injured by
prolonged exposure to high heat.
To initiate a parked regen, perform the following
steps.
1.
Park the vehicle away from all flammable materials, put the transmission in neutral, and set the
parking brake.
2.
Start and warm the engine until the coolant temperature is at least 150°F (66°C).
3.
Press and hold the regen switch for five seconds. The engine will increase rpm and initiate
the regen process. As the regen process is initiated, engine rpm increases and the HEST lamp
illuminates to indicate extremely high exhaust
temperatures.
Regen Switches
The regen request switch, located on the dash, is
used to initiate a parked regen. See Fig. 12.1, item
1. The function of the switch varies by the engine
make and model in the vehicle. See the engine operation manual for switch operation details.
1
12.2
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
IMPORTANT: The driver must remain with the
vehicle during the entire regen cycle.
High Exhaust System Temperature
(HEST) Lamp
4.
The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes,
at which time engine idle speed drops to normal
and the vehicle can be driven normally. The
HEST lamp is extinguished when vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h) or the system has
cooled to normal operating temperature.
Slow (10-second) flashing of the high exhaust system temperature (HEST) lamp indicates that a
parked regen is in progress, and the engine’s high
idle speed is being controlled by the engine software,
not the vehicle driver.
5.
To stop a parked regen at any time during the
process:
• depress the clutch pedal, brake pedal, or
accelerator pedal;
• press and hold the regen inhibit switch until
idle returns to normal;
• shut down the engine.
ATS Warning Lamps
There are three warning lamps that alert the driver of
high exhaust temperature, the need to perform a
parked regen or service the DPF, or of an engine
fault that affects emissions. A decal attached to the
driver’s sun visor explains the ATS warning lamps.
See Fig. 12.2.
See Fig. 12.3 for an explanation of the ATS warnings, and actions required to avoid engine protection
sequences.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
A steadily illuminated yellow malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) indicates an engine fault that affects the
emissions. See Fig. 12.4.
DPF Lamp
When soot accumulates in the DPF and the DPF status lamp illuminates, see Fig. 12.5, perform a parked
regen or bring the vehicle up to highway speed to
increase the load (thus starting an active regen).
If the DPF status lamp blinks while the CHECK engine lamp is illuminated, initiate a parked regen immediately in order to prevent an engine derate.
If the red STOP engine lamp illuminates with the
blinking DPF lamp and the CHECK engine lamp,
begin a parked regen in order to prevent an engine
shutdown. Park the vehicle and perform a parked
regen.
12.3
Steady illumination of the HEST lamp alerts the
driver of high exhaust temperature during the regen
process if the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/
h), or during a parked regen. See Fig. 12.6.
Maintenance
Authorized service facilities must perform any DPF
service. For warranty purposes, maintain a record
that includes:
• date of cleaning or replacement;
• vehicle mileage;
• particulate filter part number and serial number.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank,
EPA10 and Newer Engines
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is used in the ATS to
lower NOx in the exhaust stream. DEF is colorless
and close to odorless (it may have a slightly pungent
odor similar to ammonia). It is nontoxic, nonflammable, and biodegradable. It is mildly corrosive to
aluminum, but does not affect the strength or structure of the aluminum.
White crystals may be noticeable around components that come into contact with DEF. The crystals
are easily removed with water.
DEF consumption varies depending on ambient conditions and vehicle application.
Freezing Conditions
DEF freezes to slush at around 12°F (-11°C). It is not
damaged or destroyed if frozen, and is fully usable
when thawed. The DEF in the tank is allowed to
freeze while a vehicle is non-operational. At start-up,
normal operation of the vehicle is not inhibited if the
DEF is frozen; an immersion heater with engine coolant flowing through it warms the DEF once the engine is running, allowing the SCR system to operate.
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
IMPORTANT
DPF Regen Needed
1
2
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
regeneration is needed.
If flashing, regenerate as soon as
possible. Engine derate possible.
Hot exhaust can cause fire.
Hot Exhaust
Keep flammables and people away
from exhaust.
3
DEF Refill Needed
DEF
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) level is
low. Engine derate likely.
Refill tank with certified DEF.
See operator’s manual for complete instructions.
11/30/2010
24−01656−000
f080161
Fig. 12.2, Warning Lamp Decal, Sun Visor
DEF Tank
DEF in the tank. The DEF light bar illuminates as follows.
Engines that are compliant with EPA10 and newer
regulations are equipped with a DEF tank located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle behind the battery box
or forward of the fuel tank. See Fig. 12.7. The DEF
tank has a 19 mm filler neck inlet that prevents the
hose from a diesel outlet from being inserted, and
has a blue cap for easy identification.
• Four bars illuminated green—Between 75%
Fuel/DEF Gauge
• One bar illuminated green—Between approxi-
The diesel fuel and DEF levels are measured in a
dual-purpose gauge. See Fig. 12.8.
Fuel level is indicated at the top of the gauge. Below
the fuel level, a low fuel warning lamp illuminates
amber when the fuel level drops below 1/8th of the
capacity.
and 100% full
• Three bars illuminated green—Between 50%
and 75% full
• Two bars illuminated green—Between 25%
and 50% full
mately 10% and 25% full
• One bar illuminated amber—DEF very low, re-
fill DEF
• One bar flashing red—DEF empty, refill DEF
The lower portion of the gauge has a DEF warning
lamp that illuminates amber when the DEF tank is
near empty, and a lightbar that indicates the level of
12.4
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
EXHAUST AFTERTREATMENT SYSTEM INFORMATION
WARNING
INDICATOR
LAMP(S)
CHECK
(Solid)
(Flashing)
Level 1
Level 2
(Flashing)
CHECK
STOP
(Flashing)
Level 3
Level 4
Indicator Lamp
Message(s)
Filter Regeneration
Recommended
Filter Regeneration
Necessary
Parked Regeneration
Required − Engine
Derate
Parked Regeneration Required −
Engine Shut Down
Diesel Particulate
Filter Condition
Filter is reaching
capacity.
Filter is now
reaching maximum
capacity.
Switch.
Filter has reached
maximum capacity.
Filter has exceeded
maximum capacity.
Required Action
Bring vehicle to
highway speeds to
allow for an Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration.
To avoid engine
derate bring vehicle
to highway speeds
to allow for an
Automatic
Regeneration or
perform a Parked
Regeneration as
soon as possible.
Vehicle must be
parked and a Parked
Regeneration must
be performed −
engine will begin
derate.
Vehicle must be parked and a
Parked Regeneration or Service
Regeneration must be performed.
Check engine operator’s manual
for details −engine will shut down.
HEST (High Exhaust
System Temperature)
Flashing
A regeneration is in
progress.
Solid
Exhaust Components
and exhaust gas are
at high temperature.
When stationary, keep
away from people and
flammable materials
or vapors.
For a driver performed Parked Regeneration, vehicle must be equipped with a dash mounted Regeneration Switch.
See Engine Operator’s Manual for complete Regeneration Instructions.
24−01583−000B
06/29/2009
f080147
Fig. 12.3, ATS Warning Lamps
09/25/2006
f610814a
Fig. 12.4, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
09/25/2006
f610815a
Fig. 12.5, Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Status Lamp
DEF Warnings and Engine Limits
• One bar of the DEF level indicator illuminates
IMPORTANT: Ignoring the DEF warning lights
results in limited engine power, with the application of a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit.
• The DEF warning lamp illuminates solid amber.
DEF Level Low—Initial Warning
When the DEF level is low, the following lamps notify
the driver. See Fig. 12.9. Refill the DEF tank in order
to cancel the warning sequence.
amber—DEF very low, refill DEF.
DEF Empty
When the DEF level reads empty, the following
lamps notify the driver. See Fig. 12.10.
• One bar of the DEF level indicator flashes
red—DEF empty, refill DEF.
• The DEF warning lamp flashes amber.
12.5
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
DEF Contamination or SCR Tampering
NOTICE
Once contaminated DEF or tampering has been
detected, the vehicle must be taken to an authorized service facility to check the SCR system for
damage and to deactivate the warning lights and
engine limits.
09/25/2006
f610816a
Fig. 12.6, High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST)
Lamp
If contaminated DEF or tampering with the ATS is
detected, the DEF warning light flashes and the MIL
lamp illuminates to warn the driver. The CHECK engine lamp also illuminates on vehicles with a Cummins ISB or ISC/L engine. See Fig. 12.11.
• Detroit engines: Engine power is limited with
progressively harsher limits applied. If the fault
is not corrected, the STOP engine light illuminates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is applied after the next engine shutdown, while
parked and idling, or if a fuel refill is detected.
1
• Cummins engines: Engine power is limited with
progressively harsher limits applied. If the fault
is not corrected, the STOP engine light illuminates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is applied after the next engine shutdown, or while
parked and idling.
10/01/2014
f490495
1. DEF Fill Cap
Fig. 12.7, DEF Tank Location
• The MIL lamp illuminates.
Power is limited with progressively harsher engine
power limits applied.
DEF Tank Empty and Ignored
If the empty warning is ignored and the DEF tank is
not refilled, the red STOP engine lamp illuminates in
addition to the MIL lamp and CHECK engine lamp
(on vehicles with a Cummins ISB or ISC/L engine.)
See Fig. 12.11.
If the DEF is not refilled, a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed
limit is applied after the next engine shutdown, while
parked and idling, or if a fuel refill is detected.
12.6
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
1/2
1/2
1/2
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL ONLY
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL ONLY
ULTRA LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL ONLY
E
F
E
DEF
E
1
F
E
DEF
F
E
2
A
F
DEF
F
E
B
F
C
11/08/2010
f611037
A. Green bars—DEF level indicators
B. One bar illuminated amber—DEF very low, refill DEF
1. Low Fuel Warning Lamp
C. One bar flashing red—DEF empty, refill DEF
2. DEF Warning Lamp
Fig. 12.8, Fuel/DEF Gauge
A
A
B
B
07/09/2009
A. DEF Warning Lamp (illuminated)
B. DEF Lightbar (one bar amber)
Fig. 12.9, DEF Level Low Initial Warning
f470537
11/08/2010
f470539a
NOTE: MIL illuminates. CHECK engine lamp illuminates
if Cummins ISB or ISC/L engine. Engine power is limited.
A. DEF Warning Lamp (flashing)
B. DEF Lightbar (one bar flashing red)
Fig. 12.10, DEF Empty Warning
12.7
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
A
B
11/08/2010
f470540a
NOTE: STOP engine light and MIL illuminate, engine
power is limited, speed limit of 5 mph (8 km/h)
A. DEF Warning Lamp (flashing)
B. DEF Lightbar (one bar flashing red)
Fig. 12.11, DEF Empty and Ignored Warning
12.8
13
Brake Systems
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Meritor WABCO® Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
Brake Systems
Air Brake System
Brake System Components
Brake System General Information
The warning light and buzzer come on if air pressure
drops below approximately 70 psi (483 kPa) in either
system. See Table 13.1. If this happens, check the
air pressure gauges to determine which system has
low air pressure. Although the vehicle’s speed can be
reduced using the foot brake control pedal, either the
front or rear service brakes will not be operating at
full capacity, causing a longer stopping distance.
Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and have the air system repaired before continuing.
A dual air brake system consists of two independent
air systems that use a single set of brake controls.
Each system has its own reservoirs, plumbing, and
brake chambers. The primary system operates the
service brakes on the rear axle; the secondary system operates the service brakes on the front axle.
Service brake signals from both systems are sent to
the trailer.
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes
backed off or disconnected. Backing off or disconnecting the front brakes will not improve vehicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle
control, resulting in property damage or personal
injury.
IMPORTANT: In the event of a total loss of service brakes with full system air pressure, use
the parking brake control valve (yellow knob) to
bring the vehicle to a complete stop in the safest location possible.
Brake System Warning and Indicator Lamps
Lamp Description
Color
Low Air Pressure
Indicates air pressure in the primary or secondary reservoir
has dropped below approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
Red
Parking Brake
Indicates the parking brake is engaged.
Red
Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle ABS is
engaged.
WHEEL
SPIN
Vehicle ABS
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the vehicle ABS.
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer ABS is engaged.
Amber
Trailer ABS
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the trailer ABS.
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
Flashing indicates the ATC system is active, or the ATC
button has been pressed to allow wheel slip.
Amber
Wheel Spin
Solid illumination indicates a problem with the ATC system.
Repair the ATC system immediately to ensure full braking
capability.
Amber
Engine Brake
Indicates the engine brake is enabled.
Green
Table 13.1, Brake System Warning and Indicator Lamps
13.1
Brake Systems
Before a vehicle with insufficient system air pressure
can be moved, the spring parking brakes must be
released by applying an external air source at the
gladhands, or by manually caging the parking brake
springs.
stop. Apply the spring parking brakes if the vehicle is
to be parked.
Primary Air Brake System
IMPORTANT: An air brake proportioning system
may be used in tractor air brake systems when
the vehicle is not equipped with an antilock
braking system (ABS). When operating in bobtail mode, the rear brake chambers (on which
the axle load has been greatly reduced) receive
reduced (proportional) air pressure, while the
front axle brake chambers receive full (normal)
air pressure. This results in a different brake
pedal "feel," as the pedal seems to require more
travel and/or effort to slow or stop the vehicle.
However, the air brake proportioning system
actually improves vehicle control when the tractor is in bobtail mode. When the tractor is towing a trailer, the rear brake chambers will receive full (normal) application air pressure.
Loss of air pressure in the primary air system causes
the rear service brakes to become inoperative. The
secondary air system will continue to operate the
front brakes and the trailer brakes (if equipped).
When parking a vehicle attached to a trailer that
does not have spring parking brakes, apply the tractor parking brakes. Chock the trailer tires before disconnecting the vehicle from the trailer.
WARNING
Do not release the spring parking brakes and
then drive the vehicle. There would be no means
of stopping the vehicle, which could result in serious personal injury or vehicle damage. Before
releasing the spring parking brakes, make the
connection to a towing vehicle or chock the tires.
After correcting the brake system problem, uncage
the spring parking brakes before resuming normal
vehicle operation.
Secondary Air System
Loss of air pressure in the secondary air system
causes the front service brakes to become inoperative. The primary air system will continue to operate
the rear service brakes and the trailer brakes (if
equipped).
Brake System Operation
Before driving your vehicle, allow time for the air
compressor to build up a minimum of 100 psi (689
kPa) pressure in both the primary and secondary
systems. Monitor the air pressure system by observing the air pressure gauges and the low-air-pressure
warning light and buzzer. The warning light and
buzzer shut off when air pressure in both systems
reaches approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
IMPORTANT: Before driving the vehicle, secure all
loose items in the cab so that they will not fly forward
during a full brake application. Make sure all passengers are wearing seat belts.
During normal brake stops, depress the foot brake
control pedal until braking action slows down the vehicle. Increase or decrease the pressure on the
pedal so that the vehicle comes to a smooth, safe
WARNING
If a trailer or combination vehicle is not equipped
with spring parking brakes, do not park it by pulling out only the trailer air supply valve knob.
This would apply only the trailer service brakes.
If air were to bleed from the trailer brake system,
the trailer brakes would release, possibly causing
an unattended runaway vehicle.
NOTICE
Never apply the service and spring parking
brakes simultaneously. To do so transmits excessive input force to the brake components, which
could damage or cause eventual failure of brake
actuating components.
Brake Controls
The trailer brake lever (hand control valve) is used
for applying the trailer brakes without applying the
truck or tractor service brakes. It is usually mounted
on the right-hand control panel. See Fig. 13.1. The
valve can be partially or fully applied, but in any partially on position it will be overridden by a full application of the service brake pedal. Moving the lever
13.2
Brake Systems
down applies the trailer brakes, while moving it up
releases the trailer brakes. The lever will automatically return to the up position when it is released.
1
2
WARNING
Do not use the trailer service brakes for parking;
they are not designed for this purpose. If air
bleeds out of the trailer air tank during parking,
the vehicle could roll, causing serious personal
injury or property damage.
f610291
03/10/99
1. Trailer Air-Supply-Valve Knob
2. Parking-Brake-Valve Knob
Fig. 13.2, Brake Valve Knobs
NOTICE
Do not use the spring parking brakes if the service brakes are hot, such as after descending a
steep grade. To do so could damage the brakes.
Allow hot brakes to cool before using the spring
parking brakes.
f610591
10/17/2001
Fig. 13.1, Trailer Brake Lever
The red octagonal-shaped knob in the control panel
actuates the trailer air supply valve. See Fig. 13.2.
After the vehicle’s air hoses are connected to a
trailer and the pressure in both air systems is at least
65 psi (448 kPa), the trailer air supply valve must be
pushed in. It should stay in to charge the trailer air
supply system and to release the trailer spring parking brakes.
Pull the trailer air supply valve out before disconnecting a trailer or when operating a vehicle without a
trailer. If pressure in both air systems drops to 35 to
45 psi (241 to 310 kPa), the trailer air supply valve
automatically pops out, exhausting the trailer air supply, and applying the trailer service or spring parking
brakes.
The yellow diamond-shaped knob in the control
panel actuates the parking brake valve. See
Fig. 13.2. Pulling out the parking brake valve applies
both the tractor and trailer spring parking brakes and
automatically causes the trailer air supply valve to
pop out.
13.3
Do not use the spring parking brakes during
freezing temperatures if the service brakes are
wet. To do so could cause them to freeze. If the
brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low gear and
lightly apply the brakes to heat and dry them.
If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
brakes, pulling out the parking brake valve applies
the tractor spring parking brakes and the trailer service brakes. When the tractor and trailer parking
brakes (or trailer service brakes) are both applied,
the trailer brakes are released by pushing in the
trailer air supply valve, leaving the tractor parking
brakes applied. Air pressure in the primary or secondary reservoir must be at least 65 psi (448 kPa)
before the tractor spring parking brakes, or the trailer
service or spring parking brakes, can be released.
Automatic Slack Adjusters
Automatic slack adjusters should never be manually
adjusted except during routine maintenance of the
foundation brakes (e.g., replacing shoes), during
slack adjuster installation, or in an emergency situation.
When the brake pushrod stroke exceeds the legal
brake adjustment limit on a vehicle, there is likely a
mechanical problem with the foundation brake components or the adjuster is improperly installed.
Brake Systems
Visit a repair facility as soon as possible when
brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters are
determined to be out of adjustment.
WARNING
Manually adjusting an automatic slack adjuster to
bring the pushrod stroke within legal limits is
likely masking a mechanical problem. Adjustment
is not a repair. Before adjusting an automatic
slack adjuster, troubleshoot the foundation brake
system and inspect it for worn or damaged components. Improperly maintaining the vehicle braking system may lead to brake failure, resulting in
property damage, personal injury, or death.
Meritor WABCO® Antilock
Braking System
The Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System (ABS)
is an electronic wheel speed monitoring and control
system that works with the standard air brake system. ABS passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at
all times, and controls wheel speed during emergency stops.
IMPORTANT: For proper ABS system operation,
do not change tire sizes. The sizes of the tires
installed during production are programmed into
the electronic control unit. Installing differentsized tires could result in a reduced braking
force, leading to longer stopping distances.
ABS includes signal-generating tone wheels and sensors located in the wheel hubs of each sensed
wheel. The sensors transmit vehicle wheel speed
information to an electronic control unit (located behind the center dash). The control unit’s main circuit
interprets the speed sensor signals and calculates
wheel speed, wheel retardation, and a vehicle reference speed. If the calculations indicate wheel lockup,
the main circuit signals the appropriate modulator
valve to reduce braking pressure. During emergency
braking, the modulator valve alternately reduces, increases, or maintains air pressure supply in the
brake chamber to prevent front and rear wheel
lockup.
The electronic control unit (ECU) also has a safety
circuit that constantly monitors the wheel sensors,
traction control valve (if equipped), modulator valves,
and the electrical circuitry.
The Meritor WABCO ABS combines one front-axle
control channel with one rear-axle control channel to
form one control circuit. For example, the sensor and
modulator valve on the left-front axle form a control
circuit with the sensor and modulator valve on the
right-rear axle. If, during vehicle operation, the safety
circuit senses a failure in any part of the ABS, the
vehicle ABS warning lamp (see Table 13.1) illuminates and the control circuit where the failure occurred is switched to normal braking action. The remaining control circuit will retain the ABS effect. Even
if the ABS is completely inoperative, normal braking
ability is maintained. An exception would be if a
modulator valve (or combination modulator valve) is
damaged and inoperative. As these components are
an integral part of the air brake system, normal braking may be impaired or inoperative.
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
braking distance.
Although the ABS improves vehicle control during
emergency braking situations, the driver still has the
responsibility to change driving styles depending on
existing traffic and road conditions. For example, the
ABS cannot prevent an accident if the driver is
speeding or following too closely.
Trailer ABS Compatibility
The Meritor WABCO ABS is designed to communicate with a trailer ABS, if they are compatible. Compatibility will result in the illumination of the TRAILER
ABS lamp (see Table 13.1) during vehicle start-up
and fault detection.
The TRAILER ABS lamp will not illuminate unless a
compatible trailer is connected to the tractor. The
dash-mounted lamp will operate as follows when a
compatible trailer is properly connected to the tractor:
• When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
tion, the TRAILER ABS lamp will illuminate momentarily, then turn off.
• If the lamp illuminates momentarily during ve-
hicle operation, then shuts off, a fault was detected and corrected.
• If the lamp illuminates and stays on during ve-
hicle operation, there is a fault with the trailer
13.4
Brake Systems
ABS. Repair the trailer ABS system immediately to ensure full antilock braking capability.
IMPORTANT: If a compatible trailer is connected, and the lamp is not illuminating momentarily when the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, it is possible that the lamp is burnt out.
Automatic Traction Control
Vehicles with electronic engines and ABS may have
Automatic Traction Control (ATC). On these vehicles,
the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin during reduced-traction situations. In normal braking applications, the standard air brake system is in effect.
An additional solenoid valve is installed. During
reduced-traction situations, the ATC solenoid valve
controls air pressure to the modulator valves and
they in turn increase, hold, or reduce pressure to the
appropriate brake chambers to provide better traction
whenever wheel spin occurs.
When the ATC system is in the NORMAL mode, it
will apply gentle braking to the spinning wheel, to
feed power to the wheel(s) with better traction. If
both wheels are spinning, the system will signal the
engine to reduce power.
ATC includes a deep snow and mud option to increase available traction on extra soft surfaces like
snow, mud, or gravel. A rocker switch labeled ATC
will be located on the dash. See Fig. 13.3. Pressing
the switch will temporarily allow more drive wheel
spin. The activation of the deep snow and mud option is indicated by a flashing WHEEL SPIN lamp.
See Table 13.1. Pressing the switch again will cycle
the system back to normal operation.
ATC
The deep snow and mud option is intended to be
used under specific slippery conditions that require momentary increased wheel spin. Using
this option for an extended period of time may
damage the vehicle brake system.
After the ignition switch is turned on, the vehicle ABS
lamp and the WHEEL SPIN indicator lamp come on
for about three seconds. After three seconds, the
warning lights go out if all of the tractor’s ABS components are working.
IMPORTANT: If any of the ABS warning lights
do not work as described above, or come on
while driving, repair the ABS immediately to ensure full antilock braking capability.
ECAS Automatic Load Transfer
(ECAS only)
On vehicles equipped with Electronically Controlled
Air Suspension (ECAS), ECAS works in conjunction
with ABS. When wheel slippage is detected by the
ABS, the ECAS system transfers weight from the tag
axle to the drive axle by changing air pressures in
the suspension air bellows, increasing drive wheel
traction.
The ECAS Load Transfer feature is optimized to
apply the maximum available vehicle load on the
drive axle, up to the maximum allowable limit, determined by the gross axle weight rating (GAWR). In
bobtail or with a loaded trailer less than the GAWR,
the tag axle supports a negligible load while the drive
axle supports nearly the full weight. Above the
GAWR, the drive axle is loaded with approximately
the maximum allowable load and the tag supports
the remainder.
When Load Transfer mode is active, "Load Transfer"
will display in the message field of the driver message center. See Figure 13.4.
DEEP MUD
AND SNOW
08/08/2014
NOTICE
f611262
Fig. 13.3, ATC Switch
02/04/2015
f611291
Fig. 13.4, Load Transfer Notification
13.5
Brake Systems
Load transfer mode will automatically deactivate
when the vehicle reaches 45 mph (72 kmh).
Engine Brake
Each engine manufacturer uses a specific engine
brake for their engine. Regardless of the manufacturer, the engine brake is operated with the principles
outlined here. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s
operation manual for details of their particular engine
brake product.
WARNING
To avoid injury from loss of vehicle control, do
not activate the engine brake system under the
following conditions:
• on wet or slippery pavement, unless the
vehicle is equipped with antilock braking
system (ABS) and you have had prior experience driving under these conditions;
• when driving without a trailer or pulling an
empty trailer;
• if the tractor drive wheels begin to lock, or
there is fishtail motion after the engine
brake is activated.
NOTE: When the engine brake is enabled, the
engine brake lamp illuminates in the instrument
panel. See Table 13.1.
Whenever vehicle braking is required on good road
conditions, the engine brake may be used in conjunction with the service brakes. There is no time
limit for operation of the engine brake. However, an
engine brake does not provide the precise control of,
and is not a substitute for, service brakes.
WARNING
Usage of the engine brake as the primary braking
system can cause unpredictable stopping distances, that could result in personal injury or
property damage. Service brakes are the primary
vehicle braking system.
Since the engine brake is most effective at rated engine speed, gear selection is very important. Gearing
down the vehicle within the limits of the rated engine
speed makes the engine brake more effective. Rec-
ommended engine braking speed is above 1800 rpm
and below the rated speed.
WARNING
The engine brake must be disengaged when
shifting gears using the clutch pedal. If the engine brake is engaged when the transmission is
in neutral, the braking power of the engine brake
can stall the engine, which could result in loss of
vehicle control, possibly causing personal injury
and property damage.
"Control speed" is the speed at which the engine
brake performs 100 percent of the required downhill
braking, resulting in a constant speed of descent.
The control speed varies, depending on vehicle
weight and the downhill grade.
For faster descent, select a higher gear than that
used for control speed. Service brakes must then be
used intermittently to prevent engine overspeed and
to maintain desired vehicle speed.
For slower descent, select a lower gear, being careful not to overspeed the engine. Occasional deactivation of the engine brake may be necessary to maintain the designated road speed under these
conditions.
If the engine is equipped with both cruise control and
an engine brake, the engine brake can operate automatically while cruise control is activated. The maximum amount of braking is selected with the engine
brake control. When the vehicle returns to the set
cruise speed, the engine brake will turn off.
The engine brake will only operate when the accelerator and clutch pedals are fully released.
Vehicles equipped with ABS have the ability to turn
the engine brake off if wheel slip is detected. The
engine brake will automatically turn back on once
wheel slip is no longer detected.
Engine Brake Operation
NOTICE
Do not allow the engine to exceed its governed
speed, or serious engine damage could result.
13.6
Brake Systems
NOTE: Depending on the brake type, the engine
brake may be disabled when engine temperature falls below a set level.
The engine brake control is located on the right-hand
steering column lever. At the top position, the engine
brake is off, and at the three lower positions, the engine brake is on and the intensity (low, medium,
high) increases with each step down. See Fig. 13.5.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Detroit automated transmission, setting the engine brake
with the cruise control set activates Deceleration
Mode. Setting the cruise control while the engine brake is on activates Descent Control
Mode. For information on these modes, see
"Cruise Control" in Chapter 4.
0
1
2
3
02/19/2013
0. Off
1. Low
f270164a
2. Medium
3. High
Fig. 13.5, Engine Brake Positions, Detroit Multifunction
Control
13.7
14
Steering System
Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Steering System
Power Steering System
The power steering system includes the power steering gear, hydraulic hoses, power steering pump, reservoir, steering wheel and column, and other components.
The power steering pump, driven by the engine, provides the power assist for the steering system. If the
engine is not running, there is no power assist.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle without the power-assist feature of the steering system requires much greater
effort, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds,
which could result in an accident and possible
injury.
If the power-assist feature does not work due to hydraulic fluid loss, steering pump damage, or another
cause, bring the vehicle to a safe stop. Do not drive
the vehicle until the cause of the problem has been
corrected.
NOTICE
Never steam clean or high-pressure wash the
steering gear. Internal damage to gear seals, and
ultimately the steering gear, can result.
Drivers should carefully use the power available with
a power steering system. If the front tires become
lodged in a deep hole or rut, drive the vehicle out
instead of using the steering system to lift the tires
out of the hole.
NOTICE
Avoid turning the tires when they are against a
curb, as this places a heavy load on steering
components and could damage them.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
When there is no load on the vehicle and the front
tires are pointed straight ahead, the standard steering wheel spokes should be at the 3 o’clock and 9
o’clock positions or within 10 degrees of these positions. See Fig. 14.1.
14.1
10°
10°
2
1
10°
10°
08/19/2014
f462250
1. 9 o’Clock
2. 3 o’Clock
Fig. 14.1, Steering Wheel Centered
15
Automated Transmissions
Detroit™ Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Automated Transmissions
Detroit™ Automated
Transmissions
Detroit transmissions have twelve forward gears and
up to four reverse gears that can be shifted automatically or manually. Shifting and clutch actuation are
computer controlled, and there is no clutch pedal
needed to operate the vehicle. Automatic shifts are
selected for fuel economy or engine power. Manual
shifts can be requested with the shift control and the
transmission ECU grants them when conditions permit. In all cases, shifts depend on the following factors: engine speed, accelerator pedal position, service brake usage, engine brake operation, vehicle
load status, and road conditions.
4
3
1
A
2
NOTE: To avoid potential engine stall risk or unexpected shifting, use the interaxle differential
lock when the vehicle is operated in slippery
conditions. See Chapter 17 for information
about the interaxle differential lock.
Detroit™ Multifunction Control
(−)
(+)
B
Vehicles with Detroit transmissions use the control
shown in Fig. 15.1. This control can be used to request manual shifts, change driving mode, and set
engine brake levels. See Table 15.1 for an overview
of control functionality.
D/N/R Switch
Use the "D/N/R Switch" to request drive (D), neutral
(N), or reverse (R).
Mode Switch
The driving mode can be changed using the Mode
switch on the shift control (see Fig. 15.1). To activate
the manual drive mode, press and hold the switch
briefly. Press the switch quickly to activate the automatic drive mode or change between Automatic
Economy and Automatic Performance modes.
Upshifting and Downshifting
Gear shifts can be requested manually; push the
lever away to request a downshift, or pull the lever
toward you to request an upshift. See Table 15.1 for
more information about upshift and downshift
requests.
15.1
C
05/30/2012
f270163a
See Table 15.1 for a description of control functionality.
A. Front View
B. Shift Requests
C. Four positions for engine brake settings
1. Engine Brake Symbol
2. D/N/R Switch
3. Mode Switch
4. Gear Shift Symbol
Fig. 15.1, Detroit Multifunction Control
Automated Transmissions
Function/Switch
D/N/R
Mode
Upshifting and
Downshifting
Engine Brake*
Functionality, Detroit Multifunction Control
Action/Position
Request
D
Forward gears
N
Neutral
R
Reverse gears
Activate the automatic drive mode, or switch between
Depress switch and release it quickly
Automatic Economy and Automatic Performance.
Depress switch and hold it briefly
Activate the manual drive mode.
Pull the lever toward you momentarily
Upshift, single gear
Pull the lever toward you in quick repetitions
Upshift, multiple gears
Push the lever away momentarily
Downshift, single gear
Push the lever away in quick repetitions
Downshift, multiple gears
Lever at position 0 (top)
Engine brake off
Lever at position 1
Low intensity
Lever at position 2
Medium intensity
Lever at position 3 (bottom)
High intensity
* For functions with cruise control active, see Chapter 4.
Table 15.1, Functionality, Detroit Multifunction Control
Engine Brake
The engine brake is controlled by the lever position
(as shown in Fig. 15.1, Ref. C). At the top position,
the engine brake is off, and at the three lower positions, the engine brake is on and the intensity (low,
medium, high) increases with each step down. For
more information about using the engine brake, see
Chapter 13.
NOTE: Setting the cruise control with the engine
brake on will activate Descent Control Mode.
Moving the lever down to engage the engine
brake after the cruise control has been set will
activate Deceleration Mode. For information on
these modes, see "Cruise Control" in Chapter 4.
Power Up and Shift into Gear
1.
With the parking brake set and Neutral (N) selected on the shift control, turn the ignition switch
to the ON position.
2.
Start the engine.
3.
Apply the service brake.
4.
Select the desired starting gear.
5.
Release the parking brake.
6.
Release the service brake and apply the accelerator.
Gear Display Window
The gear display window shows the current transmission gear and driving mode. See Fig. 15.2.
2
1
5
A econ
N
70 °F
07/23/2015
f611187
1. Driving Mode
2. Current Gear
Fig. 15.2, Gear Display Window
Driving Modes
There are three driving modes: Manual, Automatic
Economy, and Automatic Performance.
In Automatic Economy mode, gear shifts are designed for saving fuel. In Automatic Performance
mode, gear shifts are designed for higher performance and are made at higher engine speeds. In
manual mode, gear shifts are requested manually.
15.2
Automated Transmissions
See Chapter 4 for more information about upshifting
and downshifting using the control.
NOTE: In Automatic Performance mode, the
transmission will automatically change to Automatic Economy mode if it hasn’t received a request for more power in several minutes, unless
current road conditions require higher engine
performance.
Selected Gear
If the selected gear is different than the current gear
for longer than a half second, the current gear display will flash and the selected gear value will be
shown. Once the current gear and selected gear
match, the selected gear display disappears and the
current gear display stops flashing. See Fig. 15.3.
The eCoast feature can improve driving economy.
When conditions permit, the transmission control automatically shifts the transmission to neutral to coast
at speeds of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) and
above. An "E" shows in the gear display window
when eCoast is in effect. See Fig. 15.5.
The eCoast function is not active when any of the
following occur:
• the accelerator pedal is pressed.
• vehicle acceleration rate is exceeded.
• the service brake pedal is pressed.
• the engine brake is in use.
• cruise control brakes or accelerates.
• vehicle speed exceeds the cruise control set
2
speed by more than approximately 4 mph (6
km/h).
1
7
eCoast
5
N
70 °F
A econ
• the speed limiter is active and the maximum
speed set is exceeded.
• diesel particulate filter (DPF) regeneration oc-
curs.
07/23/2015
f611188
1. Selected Gear
2. Current Gear
The eCoast function cannot be deactivated when the
Automatic Economy mode is active.
NOTE: To disable eCoast, see an authorized
Western Star service facility.
Fig. 15.3, Selected Gear Display
Suggested Shift
In Manual mode only, a suggested shift is displayed
to indicate the most economical gear available. The
suggested shift is the number of up or down arrows
from the current gear with a maximum of three up or
down arrows. See Fig. 15.4.
E
N
70 °F
A econ
07/23/2015
1
2
5
Manual
Fig. 15.5, eCoast Display
N
70 °F
07/23/2015
Creep Mode
f611189
1. Suggested Shift Arrows
2. Current Gear
Fig. 15.4, Suggested Shift
15.3
f611190
NOTE: Upshift and downshift arrows are not shown
when "E" is shown in the gear display window.
Creep mode allows the vehicle to be maneuvered at
very slow speeds. To activate Creep mode for the
first time within the current driving cycle, press the
accelerator pedal to launch the vehicle, thereby fully
Automated Transmissions
engaging the clutch. Following this and for the duration of the current driving cycle, Creep mode is active.
Once the vehicle is stopped via the service brakes,
the vehicle will begin to creep again, without the accelerator pedal actuation, as soon as the service
brakes are released.
To begin using Creep mode (once active) from a
parked position, shift from neutral to either drive or
reverse, release the service brakes, and briefly depress the accelerator pedal. The vehicle’s urge to
move can then be felt.
If creep is active and no acceleration is achieved
within five seconds, then Creep mode will abort. A
display message notifies the operator when Creep
mode is about to be aborted.
IMPORTANT: When slowing down from higher
speeds in drive or reverse, remember that
Creep mode will be in effect at lower speeds.
Use the service brakes to stop the vehicle.
Clutch Abuse Protection
A vehicle equipped with a Detroit transmission does
not have a clutch pedal, but still has a clutch that is
operated automatically and can be damaged by abusive driver actions. To protect the clutch, the vehicle
has a clutch abuse protection system that alerts the
driver and restricts functionality when needed. Extended periods in Creep Mode, slipping the clutch
(using the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on a
hill, for example), and high clutch temperatures can
activate the clutch abuse protection system. A display
message notifies the operator when the protections
are needed.
Alert Level
1
2
3
NOTICE
To hold the vehicle stationary on an uphill slope,
use the service brakes, not the accelerator pedal.
Using the accelerator pedal can overheat and
damage the clutch. To start moving, use the accelerator pedal and release the brakes as the vehicle begins to move.
There are three clutch abuse protection levels. At
each, the driver is alerted and functionality is modified; see Table 15.2.
To avoid overheating the clutch, follow these tips:
• To hold the vehicle stationary on an uphill
slope, use the service brakes, not the accelerator pedal.
• To start moving on an uphill slope, use the ac-
celerator pedal and release the brakes as the
vehicle begins to move.
• When hooking up to a trailer, ensure the trailer
is high enough to back under, and use first
gear reverse.
• Avoid starting in higher gears, and start in first
gear when a trailer is attached.
• Ensure trailer brakes have had time to com-
pletely release prior to starting.
• Do not use Creep mode for an extended pe-
riod. Stop or adjust the vehicle speed when
warned to deactivate Creep mode.
Clutch Abuse Alerts and Protections
Protections
Alert
Highest Start Gear
Creep Mode
Clutch Function
Heavy clutch load message
1
No restriction
Normal function
Heavy clutch load message
1
Disabled
Normal function
If the accelerator pedal is
depressed, the clutch closes
at fixed rate.
Clutch overload message and
1
Disabled
buzzer
If the accelerator pedal is
released, the clutch opens at
fixed rate.
Table 15.2, Clutch Abuse Alerts and Protections
15.4
Automated Transmissions
Engine Overspeed Alerts
To help protect the engine, the system has display
messages to notify the operator when the engine has
exceeded certain thresholds and needs to be slowed
down before significant engine damage occurs.
There are two warnings, one at about 2400 rpm and
another at 2500 rpm, indicated with messages and a
fault code.
Low Transmission Air Warning
Pneumatic controls are used to shift the transmission. If there is inadequate air pressure, a warning is
displayed and the quality of gear shifts may be degraded. Wait for air pressure to build before operating the vehicle.
IMPORTANT: If the low transmission air warning
indicator appears while the vehicle is in operation, safely pull the vehicle off the road, and correct the problem.
15.5
16
Manual Transmissions and
Clutch
Eaton® Fuller® Transmission Operation Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton Fuller 13-Speed and 18-Speed Splitter and Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eaton Fuller 10-Speed Range-Shift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1
16.1
16.4
16.5
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
Eaton® Fuller® Transmission
Operation Tips
NOTE: Refer to the Eaton website (www.roadranger.com) for additional information.
Follow these important operation principles:
• For all conditions, use the highest gear that is
still low enough to start the vehicle moving with
the engine at or near idle speed, and without
slipping the clutch excessively.
When operating on-highway with no load or
under ideal conditions, use 1st gear to start the
vehicle moving forward.
When operating off-road or under adverse conditions, use LOW gear to start the vehicle moving forward.
• Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation
when shifting into LOW or reverse while the
vehicle is stationary. The clutch brake is actuated by depressing the clutch pedal all the way
to the floor.
• Partially disengage the clutch to break engine
torque during normal gear shifts.
• Double-clutch between all upshifts and down-
shifts that require movement of the shift knob.
Splitting of gears does not require movement
of the shift knob.
• Never push the range-preselection lever down
Eaton Fuller 13-Speed and 18Speed Splitter and Range-Shift
Transmissions
NOTE: Refer to the Eaton website for additional
information, www.roadranger.com.
General Information, Eaton Fuller
Splitter and Range-Shift
Transmissions
Combination splitter and range-shift transmissions
allow the choice of two splitter ratios in each lever
position as well as the additional ratio provided in
each lever position after shifting to the other range.
IMPORTANT: Not all lever positions are used in
each range and the shift patterns vary between
transmissions. Be sure to read the shift pattern
decal for the specific transmission installed in
your vehicle. The shift pattern decal may be
found on the shift knob, the dash, or the visor.
13-Speed RTLO Models
Eaton Fuller 13-speed transmissions have thirteen
forward speeds and two reverse speeds. Each transmission consists of a 5-speed front section, and a
3-speed auxiliary section. The auxiliary section contains low- and high-range ratios, plus an overdrive
splitter gear. See Fig. 16.1 for the shift pattern.
into low range while operating in high range,
except when downshifting from 5th gear to 4th
gear.
Hi
R
Lo
5 5
Dir OD
7 7
Dir OD
1
3
1
• Do not shift from high range to low range at
high vehicle speeds.
A
N
• Never make a range shift or a splitter shift
while the vehicle is in reverse.
B
• Never move the range-preselection lever with
the transmission in neutral while the vehicle is
moving.
• Skip ratios while shifting only when operating
conditions permit, depending on the load,
grade, and road speed.
• Never coast with the transmission in neutral.
LOW
6 6
Dir OD
8 8
Dir OD
2
4
03/13/96
A. High Range
B. Low Range
1. Splitter Control Button
C
D
f260044a
C. Overdrive (forward)
D. Direct Drive (rearward)
Fig. 16.1, Eaton Fuller 13-Speed Transmission Shift
Pattern
All of the 13 speeds are controlled with one shift
lever. A range preselection lever and a splitter control
16.1
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
button are built into the shift knob. The range preselection lever controls range selection and the splitter
control button (located on the side of the shift knob)
controls gear splits.
Low gear in the front section is used only as a starting ratio. The remaining four forward positions are
used once in the low range and once in the high
range. However, each of the four high range gear
positions can be split with the underdrive ratio (RT
models), or overdrive ratio (RTO models) of the splitter gear. Ratios cannot be split while the transmission is in low range.
Upshifting
1.
Position the gear shift lever in neutral. Start the
engine, and bring the air system pressure up to
100 to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa).
2.
Position the range preselection lever down, into
low range. See Fig. 16.2.
1
R
One ratio in the front section (low) is used as a starting ratio; it is never used when the transmission is in
high range. Low gear can be split to provide both a
direct and an overdrive ratio.
The other four ratios in the front section are used
once in low range and once again in high range;
however, each of the five ratios (low–1–2–3–4) in low
range and each of the four ratios (5–6–7–8) in high
range can be split with the overdrive splitter gear.
LOW LOW
Dir OD
7
Dir
3
Dir
7
OD
3
OD
A
6
Dir
2
Dir
6
OD
2
OD
8
Dir
4
Dir
8
OD
4
OD
B
C
A. High Range
B. Low Range
1. Splitter Control Button
D
f260157a
03/13/96
C. Overdrive (forward)
D. Direct Drive (rearward)
Fig. 16.2, Eaton Fuller 18-Speed Transmission Shift
Pattern
3.
Make sure the splitter control button is in the direct (rearward) position. See Fig. 16.2.
4.
For 13-speed transmissions:
Press the clutch to the floor, shift into low or 1st
gear; then engage the clutch, with the engine at
or near idle speed, to start the vehicle moving.
Accelerate to 80 percent of engine governed
speed.
All of the 18 speeds are controlled with one shift
lever. A range preselection lever and a splitter control
button are built into the shift knob. The range preselection lever controls range selection and the splitter
control button (located on the side of the shift knob)
controls gear splits.
For 18-speed transmissions:
Press the clutch to the floor, shift into low; then
engage the clutch, with the engine at or near idle
speed, to start the vehicle moving.
Operation, Eaton Fuller Splitter and
Range-Shift Transmissions
IMPORTANT: The shifter knob has an interlock
feature that prevents the splitter control button
from being moved forward when the range preselection lever is down (in low range); when in
high range and the splitter control button is in
the forward position, the range preselection
lever cannot be moved down.
5
OD
1
OD
N
18-Speed RTLO Splitter and Range-Shift
Models
Eaton Fuller 18-speed transmissions have 18 forward
speeds and four reverse speeds. These transmissions consisting of a 5-speed front section and a
3-speed auxiliary section. The auxiliary section contains low and high range ratios, plus an overdrive
splitter gear.
5
Dir
1
Dir
To shift from low direct to low overdrive, move
the splitter control button into the overdrive (forward) position, then immediately release the accelerator. Press and release the clutch pedal.
After releasing the clutch, accelerate again.
5.
For 13-speed transmissions:
Shift upward from low to 1st gear, 2nd, etc. until
4th gear, double-clutching between shifts, and
accelerating to 80 percent of engine governed
speed. See Fig. 16.1.
For 18-speed transmissions:
16.2
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
To shift from 5th direct to 5th overdrive, move the
splitter control button (Fig. 16.2) into the overdrive (forward) position, then immediately release
the accelerator. Press and release the clutch
pedal. After releasing the clutch, accelerate
again.
Shift upward from low overdrive to 1st direct by
first moving the splitter control button into the
direct (rearward) position (Fig. 16.2). Move the
shift lever, double-clutching, to the 1st gear position.
Continue upshifting through the shift pattern.
Double-clutch during lever shifts (1st to 2nd to
3rd to 4th); single-clutch during split shifts (1st
direct to 1st overdrive, etc.).
6.
When in 4th gear (13-speed transmissions) or
4th overdrive (18-speed transmissions) and
ready to shift up to 5th gear, use the range shift
lever as follows:
Continue upshifting through the shift pattern.
Double-clutch during lever shifts (6th to 7th to
8th); single-clutch during split shifts (6th direct to
6th overdrive, etc.).
Downshifting
1.
Downshift from 8th overdrive to 8th direct without
moving the shift lever. Flip the splitter control button to the direct (rearward) position, then immediately release the accelerator, and disengage
the clutch. Engage the clutch, and accelerate the
engine only after the transmission has shifted.
2.
Start the downshift from 8th direct to 7th overdrive by flipping the splitter control button to the
overdrive (forward) position; then, immediately
double-clutch through neutral, moving the shift
lever from 8th to 7th gear.
3.
Shift downward through each of the high range
gears, alternating the procedures in steps 1 and
2, above, until reaching 5th direct.
4.
While in 5th direct and ready for the downshift to
4th (13-speed transmissions) or 4th overdrive
(18-speed transmissions), push the range preselection lever down. Then, double-clutch through
neutral and move the shift lever to the 4th gear
position. On 18-speed transmissions, move the
splitter control button to the overdrive (forward)
position before engaging the clutch. Do not move
the control button while the shift lever is in neutral.
5.
Continue downshifting from 4th to 1st as follows:
For 13-speed transmissions:
While in 4th gear, pull the range shift preselection lever up, into high range. The transmission
will automatically shift from low to high range as
the shift lever passes through neutral. Then, disengage the clutch; double-clutch through neutral;
move the shift lever to 5th gear; engage the
clutch, and accelerate the engine.
For 18-speed transmissions:
While in 4th overdrive, pull the range shift preselection lever up, into high range. The transmission will automatically shift from low to high
range as the shift lever passes through neutral.
Move the shift lever, double-clutching, to the 5th
gear position. Just before making final clutch engagement, move the splitter control button to the
direct (rearward) position; then engage the clutch
and accelerate. Do not move the control button
while the shift lever is in neutral.
7.
Shift up through the high range gears as follows:
For 13-speed transmissions:
To shift from 5th direct to 5th overdrive, move the
splitter control button (Fig. 16.1) into the overdrive (forward) position, then immediately release
the accelerator. Press and release the clutch
pedal. After releasing the clutch, accelerate
again.
Continue upshifting through the shift pattern.
Double-clutch during lever shifts (6th to 7th to
8th); single-clutch during split shifts (6th direct to
6th overdrive, etc.).
For 18-speed transmissions:
16.3
For 13-speed transmissions:
Downshift through the low range gears as conditions require.
For 18-speed transmissions:
Continue downshifting from 4th overdrive to 4th
direct, then 4th direct to 3rd overdrive, 3rd overdrive to 3rd direct, etc. Single-clutch when split
shifting (direct to overdrive, overdrive to direct).
Double-clutch when making lever shifts (4th to
3rd, 3rd to 2nd, etc.).
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when
downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle.
HI
9
4
7
2
R
LO
Eaton Fuller 10-Speed RangeShift Transmissions
A
N
NOTE: Refer to the Eaton website for additional
information, www.roadranger.com.
General Information, Eaton Fuller
Range-Shift
To operate a range-shift transmission, move the shift
lever through all the low gear positions and then activate a range switch to provide an additional set of
ratios in the high range. Using the same shift lever
positions as in low range, move the shift lever
through each position as before. On some models,
the initial low gear is often used only in low range.
IMPORTANT: Not all lever positions are used in each
range and the shift patterns vary between transmissions. Be sure to read the shift pattern decal for the
specific transmission installed in your vehicle. The
shift pattern decal may be found on the shift knob,
the dash, or the visor.
10-Speed FR/FRO and RT/RTO/RTX
Models
Eaton Fuller 10-speed transmissions have 10 selective, evenly spaced forward ratios. Each transmission
has a 5-speed front section and a 2-speed rear
range section. The 10 forward speeds are obtained
by twice using a 5-speed shift pattern: the first time
in low range, the second time in high range. See
Fig. 16.3 for the shift patterns.
NOTE: The 4th/9th and the 5th/10th shift positions in the RT (direct ratio) and RTX (overdrive
ratio) transmissions are directly opposite in the
RTO (overdrive ratio) transmissions
2.
Position the range preselection lever down, into
low range.
f261053
A. High Range
B. Low Range
Fig. 16.3, Eaton Fuller 10-Speed Transmission Shift
Patterns
3.
Press the clutch pedal to the floor; shift into low
or 1st gear (Table 16.1), then engage the clutch,
with the engine at or near idle speed, to start the
vehicle moving. Accelerate to 80 percent of engine governed speed.
TRANS.
MODEL
10-Speed
Direct or
Overdrive
(RT or
RTX)
Eaton Fuller Shift Progressions
LOW RANGE
HIGH
RANGE
Off-Highway On-Highway
R
2
1
3
4
R
2
5
1
3
f260329
4
5
R
6
7
8
f260329
9
10
f260330
Table 16.1, Eaton Fuller Range-Shift Shift
Progressions
4.
Shift progressively upward from low or 1st gear,
to the top gear in low range (Table 16.1),
double-clutching between shifts, and accelerating
to 80 percent of engine governed speed.
5.
While in the top gear of the low range shift pattern, and ready for the next upshift, flip the range
preselection lever up into high range. Doubleclutch through neutral, and shift into the bottom
gear in high range (Table 16.1). As the shift lever
passes through neutral, the transmission will automatically shift from low range to high range.
6.
With the transmission in high range, shift progressively upward through each of the high
range gears (Table 16.1), double-clutching between shifts.
Upshifting
Position the gear shift lever in neutral. Start the
engine, and bring the air system pressure up to
100 to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa).
B
10
5
12/15/1999
Operation, Eaton Fuller Range-Shift
1.
8
3
6
1
16.4
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
Downshifting
1.
2.
3.
With the transmission in high range, shift progressively downward to the bottom gear in high
range, double-clutching between shifts.
When in the bottom gear of the high range shift
pattern, and ready for the next downshift, push
the range preselection lever down into low range.
Double-clutch through neutral, and shift into the
top gear of the low range shift pattern. As the
shift lever passes through neutral, the transmission will automatically shift from high range to
low range.
With the transmission in low range, downshift
through the low range gears as conditions require.
IMPORTANT: Never use the clutch brake when
downshifting, or as a brake to slow the vehicle.
Clutch
General Information
The hydraulic clutch control system consists of a
pedal unit and a slave cylinder, connected by a hydraulic hose and fastened with quick-disconnect
clamps. The components of the system have been
specially designed to use DOT 4 brake fluid. The
pedal unit includes a hydraulic subassembly, composed of the master cylinder and reservoir, which
can be removed from the pedal unit for service purposes. When the clutch pedal is depressed, the fluid
in the master cylinder is forced through a hydraulic
line to the slave cylinder. The fluid pressure moves
the slave cylinder piston, pushing the plunger rod
and clutch release lever, which disengages the
clutch. The hydraulic system is self-adjusting.
Clutches are designed to absorb and dissipate more
heat than encountered in typical operation. The temperatures developed in typical operation will not
break down the clutch friction surfaces. However, if a
clutch is slipped excessively, or asked to do the job
of a fluid coupling, high temperatures develop quickly
and destroy the clutch. Temperatures generated between the flywheel, driven discs, and pressure plates
can be high enough to cause the metal to flow and
the friction facing material to char and burn.
Heat and wear are practically nonexistent when a
clutch is fully engaged. But during the moment of
engagement, when the clutch is picking up the load,
16.5
it generates considerable heat. An improperly adjusted or slipping clutch will rapidly generate sufficient heat to destroy itself.
To ensure long service life of the clutch, start in the
right gear, be alert to clutch malfunctions, and know
when to adjust the clutch.
Clutch Operation
Clutch Break-In
With a new or newly installed clutch, the clutch may
slip for a short time while the friction surfaces breakin. However, allowing the clutch to slip for more than
two seconds can severely damage the clutch disc,
pressure plate, and the flywheel.
During initial operation of a new vehicle or a vehicle
with a new clutch, check for clutch slippage during
acceleration. If the clutch slips, decelerate until the
clutch does not slip. Allow the clutch to cool 15 to 30
seconds, and then gradually accelerate again. If the
clutch continues to slip, repeat the procedure. If necessary, repeat the procedure up to five times. If the
clutch slips after five attempts, stop the vehicle. Allow
the clutch to cool for at least one hour. Notify your
Western Star dealer of the problem.
NOTICE
Do not allow sustained slippage of the clutch;
this could severely damage the clutch disc, pressure plate, or flywheel. Damage caused by clutch
slippage due to improper break-in is not warrantable.
Moving the Vehicle in the Proper Gear
An empty truck can be started in a higher transmission gear than can a partially or fully loaded truck. A
good rule of thumb for the driver to follow is to select
the gear combination that allows the vehicle to start
moving with an idling engine, or, if necessary, just
enough throttle to prevent stalling the engine. After
the clutch is fully engaged, the engine can be accelerated to the correct rpm for the upshift into the next
higher gear.
Gear Shifting Techniques
Shift into the next higher gear when the vehicle
speed allows the transmission input shaft speed to
match the flywheel speed when engaging the clutch.
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
This technique results in the smallest speed difference between the clutch disc and the flywheel and
causes the least heat and wear on the clutch assembly. When downshifting, the input shaft speed must
be increased by slightly revving the engine to match
the flywheel speed for smooth clutch engagement.
For transmission operating instructions, refer to the
transmission headings in this manual.
Vehicle Loading
Clutches are designed for specific vehicle applications and loads. These weight limitations should not
be exceeded.
NOTICE
Exceeding vehicle load limits can not only result
in damage to the clutch, but can also damage the
entire powertrain.
Using the Clutch
The clutch pedal must be used only to start the vehicle moving or while shifting. To start the vehicle
moving, depress the clutch pedal all the way to the
floor plate (see "Using the Clutch Brake") and shift
from neutral to a low gear. Slowly raise your foot until
the clutch starts to engage. In this position the clutch
is starting to connect the transmission input shaft to
the flywheel and is causing the most heat and wear.
Slightly increase the engine speed and smoothly
allow the clutch pedal to return to its at rest position.
Do not allow the clutch to remain in the partially engaged position any longer than necessary to obtain a
smooth start.
To shift gears while the vehicle is moving, push the
clutch pedal most of the way (but not all of the way)
to the floor plate. Shift the transmission into neutral
and fully release the clutch pedal. If upshifting, wait
long enough for the engine speed to decrease to the
road speed. If downshifting, increase the engine
speed to match the road speed. Again, push down
the clutch pedal part way and then move the shift
lever to the next gear position. Fully release the
clutch pedal after completing the shift.
Slightly depressing the clutch pedal while driving is
damaging to the clutch, because partial clutch engagement causes slippage and heat. Resting your
foot on the clutch pedal will also put a constant thrust
load on the release bearing, thinning the bearing lubricant and increasing the wear on the bearing.
Using the Clutch Brake
The clutch brake is applied by depressing the clutch
pedal past the fully released clutch position, almost
to the floor plate. The last part of the clutch pedal
travel will compress the clutch brake plates together,
stopping the transmission input shaft. The purpose of
the clutch brake is to stop the transmission gears
from rotating in order to quickly engage a transmission gear after idling in neutral.
NOTICE
Never apply the clutch brake when the vehicle is
moving. If the clutch brake is applied when the
vehicle is moving, the clutch brake will try to
stop or decelerate the vehicle, causing rapid
wear of the clutch brake friction discs. Considerable heat will be generated, causing damage to
the release bearings and the transmission front
bearings.
Holding the Vehicle on an Incline
Always use the vehicle service brakes to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards while stopped on a
hill. Slipping the clutch on a hill to maintain the vehicle position will quickly damage the clutch assembly.
Coasting
Coasting with the clutch pedal depressed and the
transmission in a low gear can cause high driven
disc speed. The clutch speed can be much higher
under these conditions than when the engine is driving the clutch. This condition creates a hazardous
situation due to the lack of vehicle control and due to
the high clutch disc speed. Engaging the clutch
under these conditions can cause component damage because of the shock loads to the clutch and
drivetrain.
WARNING
Always shift into the gear that is correct for the
traveling speed of the vehicle and engage the
clutch. Coasting with the clutch disengaged can
prevent engagement of the correct transmission
gear which can cause loss of vehicle control,
possibly resulting in personal injury or property
damage.
16.6
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
High clutch disc speeds while coasting can also
cause the clutch facing to be thrown off the disc.
Flying debris from the clutch can cause injury to
persons in the cab.
Clutch Maintenance
Clutch Adjustment
Eaton Fuller Solo clutches are adjustment-free. As
the clutch wears, its wear-adjusting technology monitors clutch components and makes any necessary
adjustments. The wear adjusting technology comes
from two sliding cams, which rotate to maintain the
proper adjustment. Atop the upper cam, a wear indicating tab mirrors the cam’s movement, letting you
know when it’s time to replace the clutch.
NOTICE
Operating the vehicle with incorrect free pedal
could result in clutch damage.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir
Checking
Make sure that the clutch fluid reservoir is full. See
Fig. 16.4. The reservoir is full when the fluid level is
up to the "max" mark. The fluid level must always be
above the "min" mark. Use only heavy-duty brake
fluid, DOT 4, in the clutch hydraulic system.
06/05/2007
f250664
Fig. 16.4, Clutch Fluid Reservoir
16.7
17
Drive Axles
Differential Lock, Drive Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Drive Axles
Differential Lock, Drive Axles
The driver-controlled differential lock feature (side-toside wheel lock, traction control, or traction equalizer)
is available on vehicles with single- or tandem-drive
axles.
The differential lock provides maximum traction for
slippery conditions by forcing the wheels on each
drive axle governed by the switch to rotate together.
When the differential lock is engaged, the clutch collar completely locks the differential case, gearing,
and axle shafts together, maximizing the traction of
both wheels.
Differential Lock Switch
less than 5 mph (8 km/h). Engaging the differential lock at high speeds can cause internal axle
damage.
NOTE: On some vehicles, the differential lock
system is connected through the low speed
range of the transmission. If this system is used,
the transmission must be in the low speed
range for the wheels to fully lock. In addition,
shifting out of low speed range will also disengage the differential lock.
NOTE: If the differential lock is engaged when
the engine is shut down, the differential lock will
disengage.
1.
With the engine running, press the upper half of
the differential lock switch to engage the differential lock.
2.
If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the accelerator to relieve torque on the gearing, allowing the differential to fully lock.
Each differential lock is controlled by a switch on the
dash. See Fig. 17.1.
WARNING
LIFT
AXLE
08/07/2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
3
4
Be especially careful when driving under slippery
conditions with the differential locked. Though
forward traction is improved, the vehicle can still
slip sideways, causing possible loss of vehicle
control, personal injury, and property damage.
f611259
Rear Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch
Forward Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch
Interaxle Lock Switch
Lift Axle Switch
Fig. 17.1, Axle Switches
3.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed 25 mph (40
km/h). When the differential is fully locked, the
turning radius will increase because the vehicle
understeers. See Fig. 17.2.
4.
Press the lower half of the differential lock switch
to disengage the differential lock after leaving
poor road conditions.
5.
If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the accelerator to allow the wheels to fully unlock, then
resume driving at normal speed.
Differential Lock Operation
WARNING
Locking the wheels when the vehicle is traveling
down steep grades or when the wheels are slipping could damage the differential and/or lead to
loss of vehicle control, causing personal injury
and property damage.
NOTICE
Engage the differential lock only when the vehicle is stopped or moving slowly at low speed,
17.1
Single Drive Axles with Traction
Equalizer
Some single drive axles are equipped with a traction
equalizer that is a load-sensing, self-actuating feature. A traction equalizer provides normal differential
action where traction is good. When one wheel begins to spin faster than the other, clutch plates in the
differential housing automatically engage, delivering
Drive Axles
Interaxle Lock Operation
A
NOTICE
The interaxle lock should not be engaged on a
vehicle with obviously spinning wheels. Engagement at high speed or power can damage the
axle(s).
B
f350079a
02/09/96
A. Turning Radius When the Differential Lock is
Engaged (understeer condition)
B. Turning Radius When the Differential Lock is
Disengaged
NOTE: If the interaxle lock is engaged when the
engine is turned off, the interaxle lock will disengage.
1.
With the engine running, press the upper half of
the interaxle lock switch to engage the interaxle
lock. Do not wait until traction is lost and the tires
are spinning before engaging the interaxle lock.
2.
If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the accelerator until the interaxle lock engages. The
red interaxle indicator light illuminates on the
dash message center when interaxle lock is engaged.
Fig. 17.2, Turning Radii
power to both wheels. There is no operator control
with this feature.
NOTICE
Tire sizes on both rear wheels should be the
same on axles equipped with a traction equalizer.
If not, excessive wear may occur in the traction
equalizer.
Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles
The interaxle lock (axle lock, interaxle differential
lockout) feature causes the drive axle shafts to rotate
together, and is recommended for use under adverse
road conditions where greater traction is needed.
When engaged, the interaxle lock essentially makes
the driveshaft a solid connection between the drive
axles. Power entering the forward axle is transmitted
straight through to the rearmost axle(s). Driveline
torque is now delivered equally and the drive axles,
and wheels, turn together at the same speed. The
interaxle lock increases drivetrain and tire wear and
should be used only when improved traction is
required.
NOTICE
Do not operate the vehicle continuously with the
interaxle locked during extended good road conditions. To do so could result in damage to the
axle gearing and excessive driveline and tire
wear.
3.
Proceed over poor road conditions with caution.
4.
Press the lower half of the interaxle lock switch
to disengage the interaxle lock after leaving poor
road conditions.
5.
If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the accelerator to allow the interaxle lock to disengage,
then resume driving at normal speed. Once the
interaxle lock disengages, the indicator light will
go off.
See the axle manufacturer’s website for more information.
Interaxle Lock Switch
The interaxle lock switch (see Fig. 17.1, item 3) allows the driver to lock the drive axles together.
17.2
18
Fifth Wheels
Fifth
Fifth
Fifth
Fifth
Wheels, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.1
18.1
18.4
18.7
Fifth Wheels
Fifth Wheels, General
Information
sion will not absorb road shocks, and components may be damaged.
A red LED in the switch is illuminated when the suspension is deflated.
WARNING
Do not use any fifth wheel that fails to operate
properly. Doing so may cause loss of vehicle
control, possibly resulting in severe personal injury or death.
Air Suspension Height Control Switch
NOTICE
Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground
such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the
suspension air springs from re-inflating.
The air suspension height control switch may be
used to adjust the vehicle height to aid in coupling or
uncoupling from a trailer. See Fig. 18.1. Setting the
switch to DOWN deflates the air springs to lower the
rear of the vehicle. In the UP position, the air springs
inflate to raise the rear of the vehicle to normal ride
height.
Fifth Wheel Lubrication
WARNING
Keep the fifth wheel plate lubricated to prevent
binding between the tractor and trailer. A binding
fifth wheel could cause erratic steering and loss
of vehicle control, possibly resulting in personal
injury or death.
The standard fifth wheel plate must be kept well lubricated with chassis grease to prevent friction and
binding between the vehicle fifth wheel plate and the
trailer.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, inspect the condition
of the low-lube pads. There should be no damaged
or missing pieces. Slight puckering at the outside
edges is normal.
For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the
Western Star Maintenance Manual.
Fifth Wheel Coupling
Fifth wheel coupling is activated with the lock control
handle located on either the right or left side of the
fifth wheel. Coupling is complete when the kingpin
has been forced into the jaws and the lock control
handle has moved to the locked position.
NOTICE
Some fifth wheels may be mounted on sliding
rails. Before attempting to couple a trailer to a
sliding fifth wheel, the slide feature must be
locked to prevent the top plate from sliding rapidly forward or rearward, causing damage to the
fifth wheel or kingpin.
07/22/2011
f545805
Fig. 18.1, Air Suspension Height Control Switch
NOTICE
Never exhaust air from the suspension while
driving. When the air is exhausted, the suspen-
18.1
Coupling, Fontaine and Holland Fifth
Wheels
NOTE: For a tractor equipped with a Jost fifth
wheel, see the heading Coupling, Jost Fifth
Wheel below.
1.
Chock the front and rear trailer tires.
Fifth Wheels
2.
Ensure the fifth wheel jaw is fully open and the
operating rod is in the unlocked position. See
Fig. 18.2 or Fig. 18.3.
1
2
1
A
2
1
3
1
f310447
11/02/2010
B
2
f310110a
10/26/2010
1. Safety Latch
2. Operating Rod
(locked)
NOTE: Make sure the safety latch is down when the
control handle is locked.
A. Unlocked
1. Safety Latch
Fig. 18.3, Holland Simplex SE Locking Mechanism
B. Locked
2. Lock Control Handle
D
C
Fig. 18.2, Fontaine Locking Mechanism
3.
Make sure the fifth wheel top plate is tilted so the
ramps are as low as possible.
4.
Position the tractor so that the center of the fifth
wheel is in line with the trailer kingpin. The kingpin should be in a position to enter the throat of
the locking mechanism.
NOTICE
Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
cause improper coupling, which could result in
damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
5.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel
must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer
A
B
10/28/2010
A.
B.
C.
D.
f311124
Fifth wheel must lift trailer
Adjust trailer height
Ramps tilted down
4 to 8 inches (10 to 20 cm)
Fig. 18.4, Trailer Connection Point, Standard Fifth
Wheel Plate
Adjust the trailer height if required.
For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to
8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the fifth wheel
pivot. See Fig. 18.4.
3. Operating Rod
(unlocked)
should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See
Fig. 18.5.
6.
With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the
trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
trailer. After sliding under the trailer, stop to avoid
18.2
Fifth Wheels
B
A
B
09/10/2010
f311126
A. No gap between trailer
and fifth wheel
B. Kingpin inside lock
A
Fig. 18.6, Coupling Inspection
09/10/2010
f311125
A. Adjust trailer height
10. After lockup is completed, connect the tractor-to-
trailer air system lines and the electrical cable to
the trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign
material from entering the air system lines.
B. Ramps tilted down
Fig. 18.5, Trailer Connection Point, Low-Lube Fifth
Wheel Plate
hitting the kingpin too hard, then resume backing
slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
For a standard fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel
must lift the trailer.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, do not lift the
trailer as this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
7.
Set the tractor parking brake.
NOTICE
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables positioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting
in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems.
11. Charge the air brake system and check that the
air connections do not leak.
WARNING
A visual inspection is required by law. Some improper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incorrect coupling could cause the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
or death.
8.
18.3
Incorrect fifth wheel lock adjustment could cause
the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
12. With the trailer tires chocked and the brakes set,
check for clearance between the kingpin and the
fifth wheel jaws by moving the tractor forward
and backward against the locked kingpin. If slack
is present, uncouple the trailer and have the fifth
wheel inspected and adjusted by a certified
technician.
Perform a coupling inspection, checking that
there is no gap between the bottom of the trailer
and the fifth wheel, and that the kingpin is securely locked. See Fig. 18.6.
When lockup has occurred, the fifth wheel control handle moves to the locked position. Make
sure that the safety latch is down over the lock
control handle to hold the control handle in the
locked position (the safety latch will only rotate
down if the operating rod is fully retracted in the
locked position). See Fig. 18.2 or Fig. 18.3.
9.
WARNING
Release the tractor parking brake. Test for kingpin lockup by slowly inching the tractor forward,
pulling on the trailer against the chocks.
Coupling, Jost Fifth Wheel
NOTE: For a tractor equipped with a Fontaine
or Holland fifth wheel, see the heading Coupling, Fontaine and Holland Fifth Wheels
above.
1.
Tilt the ramp down.
2.
Open the kingpin locks. See Fig. 18.7.
Fifth Wheels
1
2
A
f610291
03/10/99
09/10/2010
f311128
1. Trailer Air Supply Valve Knob
2. Parking Brake Valve Knob
A. Lock held open by catch mechanism
Fig. 18.7, Jost Release Handle Unlocked
3.
Back the tractor close to the trailer, centering the
kingpin on the fifth wheel.
4.
Chock the trailer tires.
5.
Connect the air lines and electrical cable.
6.
Ensure that the trailer air supply valve (trailer
brake) is pulled out, and that the trailer parking
brakes are set. See Fig. 18.8.
NOTICE
Fig. 18.8, Brake Valve Knobs
10. Set the tractor parking brake.
WARNING
A visual inspection is required by law. Some improper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incorrect coupling could cause the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
or death.
11. Perform a physical check for positive kingpin
lockup, ensuring that there is no gap between
the trailer and the fifth wheel. See Fig. 18.6.
Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
cause improper coupling, which could result in
damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
12. Ensure that the release handle is in the locked
7.
Adjust the trailer height (if required).
13. Release the tractor parking brake and test for
For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to
8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the pivot. See
Fig. 18.4.
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling
8.
position adjacent to the casting. See Fig. 18.9.
kingpin lockup by slowly moving the tractor forward, pulling on the trailer against the chocks.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel
must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See
Fig. 18.5.
Manual Uncoupling
Back the tractor under the trailer.
For a standard fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel
must lift the trailer.
1.
Set the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
2.
Chock the trailer rear wheels.
3.
Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is
removed from the fifth wheel.
4.
Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines
and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent
dirt or foreign material from entering the lines.
5.
Verify that both the parking brake and trailer air
supply knobs are out (see Fig. 18.8), the tractor
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, do not lift the
trailer as this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
9.
After sliding under the trailer, stop to avoid hitting
the kingpin too hard, then resume backing slowly
until the fifth wheel locks.
18.4
Fifth Wheels
OK
OK
09/10/2010
f311127
Fig. 18.9, Jost Release Handle Locked
upper rod back into the slot. See
Fig. 18.10, View D. The wheel is now
ready for coupling.
and trailer parking brakes are set, and that the
trailer is prepared for uncoupling.
6.
Release the kingpin locking mechanism following
the instructions for each manufacturer listed
below.
6.1
6.2
Jost: Pull the retractable handle out, then
secure it in the open position with the
catch. See Fig. 18.7.
Fontaine: Lift the safety latch and pull the
lock control handle to the unlocked position. See Fig. 18.2.
7.
Holland: In the locked position the safety
indicator swings freely over the operating
rod. See Fig. 18.10, View A.
Air-Actuated Uncoupling
To unlock the mechanism, manually rotate
the safety indicator toward the rear of the
fifth wheel. See Fig. 18.10, View B.
Pull the operating rod out. When the
upper operating rod shoulder is outside
the slot, raise the handle and place the
shoulder of the upper rod against the plate
casting, above the slot. See Fig. 18.10,
View C.
The fifth wheel is now in the lock position
and is ready for uncoupling. As the tractor
pulls away from the trailer the kingpin
forces the jaw to rotate, contacting the
lock. Continued rotation of the jaw forces
the lock to move outward, and drops the
18.5
6.3
Release the tractor parking brake, then drive forward slowly, allowing the trailer to slide down the
fifth wheel and pick-up ramps.
An air-actuated kingpin release valve is optional with
all fifth wheels. See Fig. 18.11.
NOTE: In the event of an air system failure, airactuated kingpins can be manually released following the instructions for manual unlocking.
WARNING
Once the kingpin release valve has been pulled
the kingpin lock is released. The vehicle MUST
NOT be driven with the trailer until the trailer has
been uncoupled and coupled again. Failure to do
so may result in separation of the trailer from the
tractor, possibly causing serious personal injury
or death.
Fifth Wheels
3
1
A
4
C
2
B
D
11/02/2010
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.
2.
f311133
Locked Position
Unlatched Position (safety indicator rotated towards the rear of the fifth wheel)
Lock Position (upper rod resting against casting above slot)
Open Position (ready for coupling)
Safety Indicator
3. Upper Rod
Operating Rod
4. Plate Casting
Fig. 18.10, Holland Kingpin Locking Mechanism
Preparing the Trailer for Uncoupling
3.
Before using the air valve to unlock a fifth wheel
kingpin, prepare the trailer as follows.
Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is
removed from the fifth wheel.
4.
Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air lines and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent dirt or
foreign material from entering the lines.
1.
Set the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
2.
Chock the rear trailer tires.
18.6
Fifth Wheels
Air-Activated Kingpin Unlock, Fontaine
and Holland Fifth Wheels
1.
Verify that both the parking brake and trailer-air
supply knobs are out (see Fig. 18.8), the tractor
and trailer parking brakes are set, and that the
trailer is prepared for uncoupling.
NOTE: If the tractor parking brake is not set, the
air-actuated kingpin-release valve will not activate.
2.
Pull and hold the kingpin release valve
(Fig. 18.11) until the kingpin lock mechanism
opens and locks in place.
4.
After the trailer has slid down the fifth wheel and
pick-up ramps, let go of the kingpin release
valve.
Fifth Wheel Slide
WARNING
Adjust the fifth wheel slide correctly, and do not
overload any tractor axle by incorrectly loading
the trailer. Incorrect slide adjustment or improper
axle loading could cause erratic steering and
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
On sliding fifth wheel assemblies, the fifth wheel
plate is attached to rails that allow forward and rearward movement of the fifth wheel in order to optimally distribute the load across the axles. Slots are
evenly spaced along the slide rails, and retractable
wedges are positioned through the slots to hold the
fifth wheel in the desiposition.
The amount of load distribution on the front steering
axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on
the steering control of the tractor. Determine the front
and rear axle weights by weighing the tractor on
scales designed for this purpose.
10/26/2010
f611102
Fig. 18.11, Air-Actuated Kingpin Release Valve
3.
Let go of the kingpin release valve.
4.
Release the tractor parking brake.
5.
Drive out from under the trailer.
Air-Activated Kingpin Unlock, Jost Fifth
Wheels
1.
Verify that both the parking brake and trailer air
supply knobs are out (see Fig. 18.8), the tractor
and trailer parking brakes are set, and that the
trailer is prepared for uncoupling.
NOTE: If the trailer parking brake is not set, the
air-actuated valve will not activate.
2.
Release the tractor parking brake.
3.
Pull and hold the kingpin release valve, then
drive forward slowly.
18.7
The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
(CMVSS) label attached to the driver-side door
frame. The desired load on the axle is no less than
80 percent of the maximum axle weight rating, but in
no instances should the axle load exceed the maximum axle weight rating given on the FMVSS or
CMVSS label.
Manual Slide Operation
Use the following procedure to manually slide the
fifth wheel. See Fig. 18.12.
1.
Stop the tractor and trailer in a straight line on
level ground. Pull the trailer air supply knob to
set the trailer parking brakes.
2.
Set the tractor parking brake, then release the
sliding mechanism using the appropriate method
for the fifth wheel manufacturer.
Fifth Wheels
1
10/26/2010
2
07/25/95
f310050
Fig. 18.13, Sliding Fifth Wheel Manual Release,
Fontaine
f310190
1. Locking Wedge
2. Slide Release Pull Handle
5
4
Fig. 18.12, Manual Release Sliding Fifth Wheel,
Fontaine
2.1
2.2
Fontaine: Lift the slide release pull handle
to disengage it from the guide plate. Then,
pull out the handle until it is in the unlocked position and can be positioned
against the guide plate to hold it out. The
handle will stay in the unlocked position
until it is manually disengaged from the
guide plate. See Fig. 18.13.
Holland: Pull the operating rod out. Make
sure both side plungers have released.
See Fig. 18.14.
3.
Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to remove the weight from the tractor.
4.
Chock the front and rear trailer tires to prevent
the trailer from moving.
NOTICE
When moving the fifth wheel to the desiposition,
be sure the trailer landing gear will not at any
time come in contact with the tractor frame or
other components. Make sure that the front of
the trailer will not come in contact with the rear
of the cab or with other components if they extend beyond the rear of the cab.
6
3
8
3
2
7
1
10/26/2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
f310445
Baseplate
Bolted Stop
Baseplate Rail
Fifth Wheel Mount
5.
6.
7.
8.
Slider Saddle Plate
Safety Latch
Operating Rod
Operating Lever
Fig. 18.14, Sliding Fifth Wheel Manual Release, Holland
Simplex
5.
Release the tractor parking brake, then slowly
move the tractor forward or backward until the
fifth wheel is in the desilocation.
WARNING
Check that the locking wedges have seated in the
slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
18.8
Fifth Wheels
6.
Set the tractor parking brake, then lock the sliding member in position using one of the following
methods:
6.1
Fontaine: Disengage the slide release
pull handle from the guide plate. The slide
release pull handle is spring-loaded in the
locked position and will seek the locked
position when disengaged from the guide
plate. After the slide release pull handle
returns to the fully locked position, visually
and physically check the locking wedges
to make sure they are fully inserted into
the slots in the slide rails. Make sure the
handle is locked in position against the
guide plate.
6.2
Holland: Raise the operating rod so that it
is free to move inward. Make sure that the
lock pins have seated in the base plate
rail holes and the operating rod moves
into the locked position.
07/22/2011
f545806
Fig. 18.15, Air Slide Switch
1
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved
slightly to enable the locking wedges to enter
the fully locked position.
Air Slide Operation
The slide feature may be operated with a dashmounted switch that operates an air cylinder that
locks and unlocks the slide.
1.
Press the top half of the air-slide switch to enable the air-slide feature. See Fig. 18.15.
Ensure the locking plungers have released. See
Fig. 18.16.
2
f310189
For Jost fifth wheels, the mechanism activates as
shown in Fig. 18.17.
07/25/95
2.
Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to remove the weight from the tractor.
Fig. 18.16, Air-Operated Sliding Fifth Wheel, Fontaine
3.
Pull the trailer air supply knob to set the trailer
parking brakes.
come in contact with the rear of the cab or other
components if they extend beyond the rear of the
cab.
4.
Slowly move the tractor forward or backward
until the fifth wheel is in the desilocation.
5.
NOTICE
Ensure the trailer landing gear does not come in
contact with the tractor frame or other components, and that the front of the trailer will not
18.9
1. Locking Wedge
2. Air Cylinder
Set the tractor parking brake.
WARNING
Check that the locking wedges have seated in the
slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
Fifth Wheels
A
B
09/10/2010
f311131
A. Unlocked
B. Locked
Fig. 18.17, Jost Sliding Fifth Wheel
trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
6.
Press the lower half of the air-slide switch to disable the air-slide feature. Visually inspect the
locking wedges or plungers to make sure that
they are fully inserted in the slide rail slots. Verify
that the plungers have engaged by tugging the
tractor forward while the trailer brakes are locked
and the tires are chocked.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved
slightly to enable the locking wedges to fully
lock.
18.10
19
Trailer Couplings
Holland Trailer Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Trailer Couplings
Holland Trailer Coupling
NOTICE
General Information
IMPORTANT: Refer to the Holland web site
(www.hollandhitch.com) for additional information.
The Holland trailer coupling is designed for use with
trailers having a maximum gross weight of 10,000 lb.
(4540 kg) for Holland PH-10RP41 and PH-10RP51,
or 30,000 lb. (13,610 kg) for Holland PH-30RP41 and
PH-30RP51. It is a rigid-type pintle hook, used only
on tractor applications, and is fastened to the rear
closing crossmember of the vehicle. It is a non-airadjusted coupling. See Fig. 19.1.
1
2
3
4
08/20/2014
1. Lock
2. Cotter Pin
6.
3. Latch
4. Pintle Hook
Trailer Hookup
1.
Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer.
2.
Remove the lock pin (if equipped), then lift the
lock handle and raise the latch.
3.
Back up the vehicle until the drawbar eye is over
the pintle hook.
4.
Lower the trailer, until the drawbar eye rests on
the pintle hook.
5.
Push the latch closed, then insert the lock pin (if
equipped).
Connect the trailer electrical and air lines.
Trailer Release
1.
Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
WARNING
Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trailers not equipped with spring parking brakes.
This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air
bleeds from the trailer brake system, brake application is lost. This could allow the unattended
vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
2.
Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer.
3.
Disconnect the trailer air and electrical lines.
Plug the air lines to keep them free of dirt.
4.
Take the weight of the trailer drawbar off the
pintle hook.
5.
Open the latch by removing the lock pin (if
equipped), then lift up the lock and raise the
latch.
6.
Slowly drive the vehicle away from the trailer.
f311176
Fig. 19.1, Holland Trailer Coupling (typical)
19.1
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables positioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rubbing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting
in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, potentially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems.
20
Headlight Aiming
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Checking Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Adjusting Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Headlight Aiming
Preliminary Checks
Before checking or adjusting the headlight aim, complete the following inspection:
• Check that the hood is closed and latched.
• Remove any large amounts of mud or ice from
the underside of the fenders.
• Check the springs for sagging or broken
If the distance between either projection center
and the mark made on the wall or screen is
greater than the maximum distance given in
Table 20.1, adjust the vertical positioning of that
headlight.
IMPORTANT: The zone of high-intensity light
from a low-beam lamp should not project above
the low-beam angle upper limit. See Fig. 20.3
for an example of correctly aimed headlights.
leaves.
• Check the suspension for proper functioning of
the leveling mechanism. On cabs with air suspensions, make sure that the height is properly
adjusted.
• Check for damage to the hood and hinge as-
sembly. Repair as necessary.
• With the vehicle unloaded, check that the tires
are inflated to the recommended air pressure.
• Clean the headlight lenses. Use a soft cloth
with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent, and
water.
Checking Headlight Aim
1.
Park the vehicle on a level surface, 25 ft (7.6 m)
away from, and perpendicular to, a vertical
screen or wall. Shut down the engine and set the
parking brake. Chock the tires.
2.
On each headlight, find the low-beam bulb center, marked by a small transparent ring on the
inside of the headlight lens.
3.
Measure the distance from the ground to the
center of each headlight bulb (Fig. 20.1, Item A).
Note those distances.
4.
On the screen or wall, mark the locations of each
low-beam headlight bulb center using the distances found in step 3. See Fig. 20.1, Items 2
and 3.
5.
Turn on the low-beam headlights.
6.
Check the vertical adjustment of the low beams.
The center of each beam projection should fall
on or near the marks made during step 4. See
Fig. 20.2.
7.
Use Table 20.1 to determine the maximum vertical distance allowable between the marks on the
wall and the center of each beam projection.
20.1
Adjusting Headlight Aim
Headlight adjustment is made on the bottom of the
headlight assembly, accessible through the wheel
well when the hood is closed. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver inserted through the slot in the hoodmounted splash shield (Fig. 20.4), turn the adjusting
screw clockwise to raise the beam and counterclockwise to lower it, until the beam pattern meets the acceptable standard.
Headlight Aiming
2
3
A
A
B
B
7.6 m)
25 ft (
1
10/21/2014
A.
B.
1.
2.
f545850h
Measure the distance from the ground to the center of each headlight bulb.
Mark where the center of each headlight projection should appear.
Screen or Wall
3. Center of Left-Hand Headlight Projection
Center of Right-Hand Headlight Projection
Fig. 20.1, Headlight Aiming Screen/Wall
A
1
2
3
10/20/2014
f545851h
A. Measurement: 25 ft (7.6 m)
1. Low-Beam Angle Upper Limit
2. Ideal Low-Beam Projection
3. Low-Beam Angle Lower Limit
Fig. 20.2, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
20.2
Headlight Aiming
Distance Between Ground
and Headlight: in (mm)
22–36 (560–900)
36–48 (900–1200)
48–54 (1200–1400)
Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
Desired Variation (Fig. 20.2, Upper Limit (Fig. 20.2, Item
Item 2) : in (mm)
1): in (mm) up
0
3.9 (100)
2 (50) down
2 (50)
3.9 (100) down
1.6 (40)
Lower Limit (Fig. 20.2, Item
3): in (mm) down
3.9 (100)
6 (150)
6.5 (165)
Table 20.1, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
2
3
3
1
02/09/2015
1. Ground
2. Low-Beam Angle
Upper Limit
f546133
3. Low-Beam Vertical
Center Line
Fig. 20.3, Beam Projection of Correctly Aimed
Headlights
02/04/2015
f546104a
Fig. 20.4, Headlight Adjustment Slot (shown with the
hood open)
20.3
21
Vehicle Appearance and
Care
Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dashboard and Instrument Panel Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.1
21.1
21.1
21.1
21.2
21.2
21.3
Vehicle Appearance and Care
Cab Washing and Polishing
IMPORTANT: Carefully read all instructions before using or applying any cleaner or product on
the vehicle or components. Failure to follow
manufacturers’ recommendations can result in
damage to the finish.
To protect the finish of your new vehicle, follow these
guidelines carefully.
• During the first 30 days, rinse your vehicle fre-
quently with water. If the vehicle is dirty, use a
mild liquid soap. Do not use detergent.
• During the first 30 days, do not use anything
abrasive on your vehicle. Brushes, chemicals,
and cleaners may scratch the finish.
• During the first 120 days, do not wax your
vehicle.
To extend the life of your vehicle’s finish, follow these
guidelines.
• Avoid washing your vehicle in the hot sun.
• Always use water. After the cab is completely
washed, dry it with a towel or chamois.
• Do not dust painted surfaces with a dry cloth,
as this will scratch the paint.
• Do not remove ice or snow from a painted sur-
face with a scraper of any sort.
• To prevent damage to the finish, wax it regu-
larly. Before waxing, if the finish has become
dull, remove oxidized paint using a cleaner
specifically designed for this purpose. Remove
all road tar and tree sap before waxing. Western Star Trucks recommends using a high
quality brand of cleaner or cleaner-polish and
polishing wax.
• Do not let diesel fuel or antifreeze stand on a
• Do not pressure wash the label or sticker or
surfaces near it.
• Do not use strong alkaline soaps on or near
the label or sticker.
Care of Fiberglass Parts
Wash unpainted fiberglass air fairings and shields
monthly with a mild detergent, such as dishwashing
liquid. Avoid strong alkaline cleansers.
Apply a wax specifically designed for fiberglass.
Care of Chrome Parts
To prevent rust, keep chrome parts clean and protected at all times. This is especially important during
winter driving and in coastal areas where there is
exposure to salt air.
When cleaning chrome parts, use clean water and a
soft cloth or sponge. A mild detergent may also be
used.
Sponge gently, then rinse. If necessary, use a nonabrasive chrome cleaner to remove stubborn rust or
other material. Do not use steel wool.
To help protect the chrome after cleaning, apply a
coat of polishing wax to the surface. Never use wax
on parts that are exposed to high heat, such as exhaust pipes.
Care of Exterior Lights
Clean the headlight lenses by hand only. Use a flannel cloth with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent,
and water.
painted surface. If either should occur, rinse
the surface off with water.
NOTICE
• To prevent rust, have any nicks or other dam-
Do not use a power buffer, paper towels, chemical solvents, or abrasive cleaners on the headlight lens, all of which can remove the UV coating
from the surface, and result in yellowing of the
lens.
age on the finish touched up as soon as possible.
• Park your vehicle in a sheltered area whenever
possible.
21.1
To prevent delamination and deterioration of labels
and stickers on the cab, follow these guidlines carefully:
Vehicle Appearance and Care
Dashboard and Instrument
Panel Care
NOTICE
When cleaning the dashboard, instrument panel,
or gauge lens covers, do not use Armor-All Protectant®, STP Son-of-a-Gun®, window cleaner, or
other equivalent treatments. These cleaners contain vinyl plasticizers which can cause stress
crazing in the interior plastic panels and can result in cracking of the panels. Some cleaners can
also have an adverse effect on the clear plastic
of instrument panels and gauge lens covers, resulting in a foggy or cloudy appearance. This
type of damage is not covered by vehicle warranty.
used with caution as they can scratch the vinyl or
give it a permanent dull appearance.
Chewing Gum
Harden the gum with an ice cube wrapped in a plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Remove
any remaining traces of gum with an all-purpose light
oil (peanut butter will also work). Wipe off the gum
and oil substance.
Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote
Each of these items stains vinyl after prolonged contact. Wipe any of these items off immediately and
carefully clean the area using a cloth dampened with
naphtha.
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks
To clean the dashboard, instrument panel, and gauge
lens covers, use a cloth dampened with warm soapy
water. Make certain to wring the cloth out well before
cleaning, as excess water will damage the electrical
components.
Remove paint immediately. Do not use paint remover
or liquid-type brush cleaner on vinyl. An unprinted
cloth, dampened with naphtha or turpentine may be
used. Use care to prevent contact with parts of the
upholstery that are not vinyl.
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning
Sulfide Stains
To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brushing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Harsh
cleaning agents can cause permanent damage to
vinyl upholstery.
To preserve the upholstery and prevent damage,
carefully review the following sections for recommended cleaning procedures. Waxing or refinishing
improves soil resistance and cleanability for all vinyls.
Use any hard wax, such as that used on automobiles.
Sulfide compounds, such as those found in eggs and
some canned goods, can stain after prolonged contact with vinyl. Remove these stains by placing a
clean, unprinted piece of cloth over the spotted area
and pouring a liberal amount of 6 percent hydrogen
peroxide onto the cloth. Allow the saturated cloth to
remain on the spot for 30 to 60 minutes. For stubborn spots, allow the hydrogen-peroxide saturated
cloth to remain on the area overnight. Use caution to
prevent the solution from seeping into the seams,
where it can weaken the cotton thread.
Ordinary Dirt
Nail Polish and Nail Polish Remover
Wash the upholstery with warm water and mild soap,
such as saddle or oil soap. Apply soapy water to a
large area and allow to soak for a few minutes, then
rub briskly with a cloth to remove the dirt. Repeat
several times, as necessary.
Prolonged contact with these substances causes permanent damage to vinyl. Careful blotting immediately
after contact minimizes damage. Do not spread the
liquid during removal.
If dirt is deeply imbedded, use a soft bristle brush
after applying the soap.
Shoe Polish
If dirt is extremely difficult to remove, use a wallwashing preparation such as those normally found
around the home. Powdered cleaners, such as those
used for sinks and tiles, are abrasive and must be
Most shoe polishes contain dyes which penetrate
vinyl and stain it permanently. Wipe shoe polish off
as quickly as possible using naphtha or lighter fluid.
If staining occurs, try the procedure used for sulfide
stains.
21.2
Vehicle Appearance and Care
Ball Point Ink
Mildew
Rub ball point ink immediately with a damp cloth,
using water or rubbing alcohol. If this does not work,
try the procedure used for sulfide stains.
Brush the dry fabric with a soft brush. Sponge with
detergent, and blot. If the fabric is colorfast, dilute a
teaspoon of bleach in one quart (one liter) of cool
water. Apply with a swab, directly on the mildew
stain. Dab repeatedly with clear, cool water, and blot
dry.
Miscellaneous
If stains do not respond to any of the treatments described above, it is sometimes helpful to expose the
vinyl to direct sunlight for up to 30 hours. Mustard,
ball point ink, certain shoe polishes, and dyes often
bleach out in direct sunlight, leaving the vinyl undamaged.
Velour Upholstery Cleaning
To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brushing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Spot
clean with a mild solvent or an upholstery shampoo,
or the foam from a mild detergent. When using a solvent or a dry-cleaning product, follow the instructions
carefully, and clean only in a well-ventilated area.
Avoid any product that contains carbon tetrachloride
or other toxic materials. With either method, pretest a
small area before proceeding. Use a professional
upholstery cleaning service when extensive cleaning
is needed.
Grease and Oil-Based Stains
Dampen a small absorbent cloth with dry-cleaning
solvent or spot remover. Apply the cloth carefully to
the spot from the outer edge to the center. Pat and
blot the spot with a clean, dry cloth. Repeat several
times, as necessary, turning the cloths so that the
stain does not redeposit on the fabric.
Sugar and Water-Based Stains
Apply water-based detergent or cleaner, working in
circular motions. Pat and blot as dry as possible. Repeat, if necessary, before drying thoroughly.
Chewing Gum or Wax
Harden the gum or wax with an ice cube wrapped in
a plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Absorb excess wax by placing a thick white blotter over
the wax and heating with a warm (not hot) iron. Remove the remainder by using the procedure for
grease and oil-based stains.
21.3
22
Pre- and Post-Trip
Checklists
Periodic Inspections and Maintenance, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Periodic Inspections and
Maintenance, General
Information
5
6
Regulations in Canada and the U.S. clearly indicate
that it is the driver’s responsibility to perform an inspection, and ensure the complete road-worthiness
of a vehicle, before placing it into service. Commercial vehicles may be subject to inspection by authorized inspectors, and an unsafe vehicle can be taken
"out of service" until the driver or owner repairs it.
Use the following checklists to ensure that vehicle
components are in good working condition before
each trip. Careful inspections eliminate stops later to
fix overlooked or forgotten items.
The checklists in this chapter can be copied and kept
as a record that the procedures have been completed. For details on how to inspect each item on
the checklists, see the corresponding procedure
(step number) in Chapter 23.
NOTE: Checklists in this chapter correspond
with the procedures and steps in Chapter 23,
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance. Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all components listed below.
Daily Pretrip Inspection Checklists
See the following tables for a list of procedures that
should be performed daily, before the first trip. Place
a check mark in the complete (Comp.) column to
indicate a procedure has been performed.
Inspector
Comp.
2
3
4
Saddle Tank Areas
Drain air reservoirs (without automatic drain
valves)
Fuel tank(s) secure
Frame rails and crossmembers
Visible exhaust components
Engine Compartment
Leakage under engine
Air intake system
Engine oil level
Power steering reservoir level
Engine coolant level
Visible engine wiring
Frame rails
Comp.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
Checklists
Date
Wheels and Tires
Comp.
Wheel bearing oil seals and lubrication levels
Mud Flaps
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Cab
Comp.
Reset dash-mounted air intake restriction
indicator
Air-pressure warning systems
Air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures
Air pressure build-up time
Air system leakage
Air pressure reserve
Mirrors, windows, windshield
Horn, windshield wipers, windshield washers
Heater and defroster
Interior lights
Exterior lights
Seat belts and tether belts
Fuel level
Mirror adjustment
Service brakes
Backup alarm
Comp.
Weekly Post-trip Inspection Checklist
1
2
Suspension and Slack Adjusters
Suspension components
Slack adjusters
Comp.
1
2
3
4
Wheels and Tires
Wheel covers
Tire condition
Tire inflation
Rims and wheel components
See the following table for procedures that should be
performed weekly, post-trip. Place a check mark in
the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a procedure has been performed.
22.1
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Inspector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Engine Compartment
Windshield washer reservoir level
Air intake restriction indicator
Water evacuation components
Automatic transmission fluid level
Water in fuel/water separator
Steering components
Serpentine drive belts
Date
Comp.
Fluids Added During Inspection
Fluid
Amount Added
Wheel Bearing Lubricant
Engine Oil
Power Steering Fluid
Engine Coolant
Windshield Washer Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (DOT
4 brake fluid)
Monthly Post-trip Inspection
Checklists
See the following tables for procedures that should
be performed monthly, post-trip. Place a check mark
in the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a procedure has been performed.
Inspector
Date
Brake Components
Brake system components
Brake chambers
Air brake lines
Flex air hoses
Brake linings and brake drums
Brake lining thickness
Comp.
Comp.
2
3
Saddle Tank Areas
Drain air reservoirs (with automatic drain
valves)
Batteries (location may vary)
Aerodynamic components
Engine Compartment
Hood and bumper
Hydraulic clutch reservoir
Radiator and heater hoses
Steering wheel play
Comp.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
Fluids Added
Use the following table to note any fluids that were
added during the inspection and maintenance procedures.
22.2
23
Pre- and Post-Trip
Inspections and
Maintenance
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Daily Pretrip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.11
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
• spring hangers
Safety Precautions
• shocks
DANGER
When working on the vehicle, shut down the engine, set the parking brake, and chock the tires.
Before working under the vehicle, always place
jack stands under the frame rails to ensure the
vehicle can not drop. Failure to follow these
steps could result in serious personal injury or
death.
• suspension arms
• suspension brackets
• axle seats
• bushings
2.
Inspect slack adjusters for signs of damage. See
Fig. 23.1, Fig. 23.2, or Fig. 23.3.
Daily Pretrip Inspections and
Maintenance
Complete the following inspection and maintenance
procedures to ensure that vehicle components are in
good working condition before each trip. A driver who
is familiar with the vehicle and drives it regularly can
perform the daily inspections, then add the weekly
and monthly post-trip inspections as scheduled.
3
4
5
6
7
If the driver does not operate the vehicle on a consistent basis, all daily, weekly, and monthly inspection and maintenance procedures should be performed before the trip.
8
IMPORTANT: The pre- and post-trip checklists,
inspections, and maintenance procedures detailed in this chapter are not all-inclusive.
Refer to other component and body manufacturers’ instructions for specific inspection and
maintenance instructions, as well as local, state,
and federal guidelines.
NOTE: If any system or component does not
pass this inspection, it must be corrected before
operating the vehicle. Whenever equipment requires adjustment, replacement, and/or repair,
see the Western Star Workshop Manual for procedures and specifications.
Suspension and Slack Adjuster
Inspection
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect suspension and slack adjuster components.
1.
Inspect the following suspension components for
signs of structural damage, cracks, or wear.
• springs
23.1
2
9
01/31/2011
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1
10
f422530
Grease Fitting (if equipped)
Slack Adjuster Housing
Brake Chamber Pushrod
Clevis
Clevis Pin (large)
Clevis Pin (small)
Actuator Rod
Boot
Manual Adjusting Nut
Camshaft Splines
Fig. 23.1, Meritor Automatic Slack Adjuster
• Inspect slack adjuster boots, if equipped,
for cuts or tears.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
3
8
2
9
9
8
4
1
7
10
6
f421398
06/17/2003
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
7/16-inch Adjusting Nut
Grease Fitting
Boot
Link
Brake Chamber Piston Rod
Clevis
1/2-inch Clevis Pin
1/4-inch Clevis Pin
Grease Relief Opening
Slack Adjuster Spline
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
• Inspect anchor straps, if equipped, for
damage.
• Look for worn clevis pins on brake cham• Look for missing or damaged cotter pins
on the clevis pins.
• Ensure chamber piston rods are in line
with the slack adjusters.
Wheel and Tire Inspection
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect each
wheel and tire assembly.
IMPORTANT: Wheel covers decrease drag force
as a vehicle moves, thereby improving fuel efficiency. If replacement of a wheel cover is necessary, the replacement cover must meet or exceed the drag reduction performance of the
originally installed cover in order to maintain
compliance with greenhouse gas and full efficiency regulations (GHG14).
Clevis
Slack Adjuster
Clevis Pin
Manual Adjusting Nut
Control Arm
f421397
6. Control-Arm Washers
and Nut
7. Anchor Strap Slot
8. Anchor Strap
9. Brake Chamber
Fig. 23.3, Haldex Automatic Slack Adjuster
Fig. 23.2, Gunite Automatic Slack Adjuster
ber pushrods.
A
10/11/2005
If the vehicle was originally equipped with wheel
covers, ensure all wheel covers are present. Inspect wheel covers for damage or wear. Remove
wheel covers from rear drive wheels, if equipped,
prior to inspecting the tires and wheel components.
NOTE: During wheel cover installation, ensure
the V-notch in the liner inner retaining ring is
centered on the valve stem. The inner and outer
retaining rings should be uniformly aligned to
each other and to the wheel rim. The outer retaining ring of the liner is equipped with two
canvas flaps. When installing the face cover,
make sure the cover retaining ring is inserted
between the two canvas flaps on the liner outer
retaining ring so that the Velcro strips line up
between the face cover and the liner. Make certain the detachable view cover is centered on
the face cover, and the Velcro strips are
pressed firmly in place.
2.
Inspect each tire for the following:
• valve stem caps on every tire, screwed on
finger-tight
23.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
• bulges, cracks, cuts, and penetrations
• oil contamination (petroleum derivatives will
soften the rubber and destroy the tire)
• tread depth—if tread is less than 4/32 inch
(3 mm) on any front tire, or less than 2/32
inch (1.5 mm) on any rear tire, replace the
tire
• debris lodged between duel tire sets
IMPORTANT: Low-rolling resistance (LRR) tires
minimize wasted energy as a tire rolls, thereby
decreasing rolling effort and improving fuel efficiency. If tire replacement is necessary, replacement tires must meet or exceed the rolling resistance of the originally installed tires in order to
maintain compliance with greenhouse gas and
full efficiency regulations (GHG14).
Contact your tire manufacturer/supplier to determine the rolling resistance of the originally installed tires. Visit www.epa.gov/smartway for
additional information and resources.
3.
Check tire inflation.
IMPORTANT: The load and cold inflation pressure must not exceed the rim or wheel manufacturer’s recommendations, even though the
tire may be approved for a higher load inflation.
Consult the rim or wheel manufacturer for the
correct tire inflation pressure for the vehicle
load.
4.
4.1
Keep compressed air reservoirs and lines dry
during tire inflation. Use well-maintained inline
moisture traps and service them regularly.
WARNING
Have any worn or damaged wheel components
replaced by a qualified person using the wheel
manufacturer’s instructions and the wheel industry’s standard safety precautions and equipment.
Otherwise a vehicle or workshop accident could
occur, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or death.
4.2
A weekly pressure loss of 4 psi (28 kPa) or more
in a tire may indicate damage. The tire should be
inspected and, if necessary, repaired or replaced
by a qualified tire service facility.
23.3
Inspect for broken, cracked, badly worn,
bent, rusty, or sprung rings and rims.
NOTICE
Use the recommended torque values and follow
the proper tightening sequence. Insufficient
wheel nut torque can cause wheel shimmy, resulting in wheel damage, stud breakage, and extreme tire tread wear. Excessive wheel nut torque
can break studs, damage threads, and crack
discs in the stud hole area.
Do not operate the vehicle with underinflated or
overinflated tires. Incorrect inflation can stress
the tires and make the tires and rims more susceptible to damage, possibly leading to rim or
tire failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
NOTICE
Remove all dirt and debris from the assembly. Rust streaks or metal build-up
around stud holes, or out-of-round or worn
stud holes, may be caused by loose wheel
nuts.
WARNING
For inflation pressures and maximum loads, see
the tire manufacturer’s guidelines. Inflate the tires
to the applicable pressures if needed.
If a tire has been run flat or under-inflated, check
the wheel and tire for damage before adding air.
Examine each rim and wheel component.
4.3
5.
Make sure all wheel nuts are tightened. If
tightening is necessary, use the tightening
pattern in Fig. 23.4 to initially tighten the
flange nuts to 50 to 100 lbf·ft (68 to 136
N·m). Then tighten the flange nuts to 450
to 500 lbf·ft (610 to 678 N·m).
Inspect the outboard side of all wheel hubs and
the hub oil seal area on the inboard side of each
wheel for signs of oil leakage. If any oil is found
on wheel and tire or brake components, remove
the vehicle from service until the leak has been
fixed.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
WARNING
1
10
8
3
Never operate the engine with the fuel tank shutoff valves partially closed. This could damage the
fuel pump, causing sudden loss of engine power,
possibly resulting in serious personal injury due
to reduced vehicle control.
6
2.
4
5
Ensure fuel tanks are secured to their mounting
brackets and that the mounting brackets are secured to the frame.
If equipped with fuel tank shutoff valves, be sure
the valves are fully open.
9
7
3.
Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny
areas, or rust streaks. Check all visible crossmembers for damage or signs of looseness.
4.
Inspect visible components of the exhaust system to ensure connections are tight.
2
04/30/2007
f400268
Fig. 23.4, Tightening Pattern, 10-Hole Wheels
If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on
the hub cap. See Group 35 of the Western Star
Maintenance Manual for recommended lubricants.
6.
Check that mud flaps are undamaged and hang
10 inches (25.4 cm) or less from the ground.
Saddle Tank Areas Inspection
WARNING
Inspect upstream of the aftertreatment device
(ATD), if equipped, for cracking or signs of leaks,
such as soot trails. Inspect downstream of the
ATD for signs of exhaust leaks, such as blistering or warping of nearby components.
Engine Compartment Inspection
1.
Check the ground underneath the engine for fuel,
oil, or coolant leaks.
2.
Inspect the air intake system for leaks or damage.
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
sludge particles may be in the airstream and
could cause injury.
NOTICE
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air
brake system, which could adversely affect braking.
1.
NOTICE
Failure to maintain a sealed air intake system
could allow the entry of dirt and contaminants
into the engine. This could adversely affect engine performance and result in engine damage.
Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs
without automatic drain valves only).
3.
2.1
Push the reset button on the air intake
restriction indicator located on the air
cleaner, if equipped.
2.2
Check the air intake duct from the air
cleaner to the engine intake. Make sure
the duct components are secure and airtight.
Check the engine oil level.
23.4
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
NOTICE
NOTICE
Operating the engine with the oil level below the
minimum fill (or "add") mark or above the maximum fill (or "full") mark could result in engine
damage.
3.1
Check the oil level with the vehicle parked
on a level surface. See the engine manufacturer’s guidelines for engine shutdown
time requirements prior to checking the oil
level.
Low coolant could result in engine overheating,
which could cause engine damage.
IMPORTANT: The surge tank must be cool to
check the coolant level.
5.
Check the engine coolant level in the radiator
surge tank. See Fig. 23.6.
2
IMPORTANT: On engines that comply with
EPA07 or newer regulations, use CJ-4 engine oil with less than 1% sulfated ash. Failure to use CJ-4 oil may void the warranty on
emission aftertreatment components.
3.2
4.
3
4
If the oil level is at or below the minimum
fill (or "add") mark on the dipstick, add
enough oil to maintain the level between
the minimum and maximum fill marks. See
the engine operation manual for recommended lubricants.
Check the power steering reservoir fluid level.
The power steering fluid level should be between
the MIN COLD mark and the middle mark just
above it. See Fig. 23.5. If needed, fill the reservoir with automatic transmission fluid that meets
Dexron III or TES-389 specifications.
1
5
4
f500390
02/05/2013
1. Pressure Relief Cap
2. Filler Cap
3. COLD MAX Fill Line
4. COLD MIN Fill Line
5. Coolant Level Sensor
Fig. 23.6, Coolant Surge Tank
NOTICE
Coolant must be filled to the COLD MAX line of
the surge tank. Low coolant could result in engine overheating, which could cause engine damage.
1
12/15/2014
If the coolant is low, fill the surge tank to
the MAX line with a 50/50 mixture of water
and the type of antifreeze currently installed in your vehicle.
5.2
If the surge tank was empty, start the engine after refilling and check the level
again when the engine is at operating
temperature.
f462252
NOTE: Typical reservoir shown; configurations may
vary.
1. Filler Cap
Fig. 23.5, Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6.
23.5
5.1
Inspect visible engine wiring for damage or
looseness. Check for loose wiring, chafed insulation, and damaged or loose hold-down clamps.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
7.
Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny
areas, or rust streaks.
4.3
Note the time that the pressure reaches
the previously noted reading on the primary air gauge, then note the time that
the air pressure reaches cut-out pressure.
4.4
If it takes longer than 30 seconds to reach
cut-out pressure after the primary air
gauge passes the previously noted pressure (noted after one full brake application), eliminate any leaks or replace the air
compressor before operating the vehicle.
Cab Inspection
1.
Push the reset button on the dash-mounted air
intake restriction indicator, if equipped.
2.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position,
check the air-pressure warning system.
2.1
2.2
3.
If not previously drained, drain the air reservoirs using moderate brake applications
until pressure in both reservoirs is less
than 70 psi (483 kPa).
Turn the ignition to the ON position. The
ICU will complete a full gauge sweep and
bulb check, and an audible warning will
sound. Ensure the low air pressure lamp
(BRAKE AIR) remains illuminated and an
audible warning continues to sound after
the gauge sweep is complete.
Start the engine and ensure the BRAKE
AIR lamp goes out and the buzzer silences when pressure reaches approximately 70 psi (483 kPa) in both air reservoirs.
The air governor should cut out at approximately 120 psi (827 kPa). For vehicles with an optional dryer reservoir
module (DRM), the cut-out pressure is
approximately 130 psi (896 kPa).
3.2
With the engine idling, apply the brake
pedal several times. The air governor
should cut in when pressure in the primary
air reservoir (top air gauge) reaches approximately 100 psi (689 kPa).
Check air pressure build-up time.
4.1
4.2
With the air system fully charged, make
one full brake application and note the air
pressure reading on the primary air
gauge.
Further reduce air pressure using moderate brake applications, then run the engine at governed rpm.
Check air leakage in the system.
5.1
With the parking brake applied, the transmission out of gear, and the air system
fully charged, release the service brakes
and shut down the engine.
5.2
Wait one minute and note the air pressure
drop in psi (kPa) per minute from the primary air reservoir.
If the pressure drop exceeds the limits
shown in Table 23.1, eliminate any leaks
before operating the vehicle.
Check air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures.
3.1
4.
5.
6.
Check the air pressure reserve.
With the engine still off, make one full brake application and observe the pressure drop on the
primary air gauge. If pressure drops more than
25 psi (172 kPa), eliminate any leaks before operating the vehicle.
Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
Pressure Drop:
psi (kPa) Per Minute
Description
Released Applied
Truck or Tractor Only
2 (14)
3 (21)
Truck or Tractor w/Single Trailer
3 (21)
4 (28)
Truck or Tractor w/Two Trailers
5 (35)
6 (42)
Table 23.1, Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
WARNING
When cleaning windshields and windows, always
stand on the ground or on a secure ladder or
platform. Use a long-handled window cleaner. Do
not use the cab steps, tires, fenders, fuel tanks,
engine, or under-hood components to access the
windshield or windows. Doing so could cause a
fall and result in an injury.
23.6
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
7.
Inspect the mirrors, window glass, and windshield for cracks or other damage.
8.
Ensure that the horn, windshield wipers, and
windshield washers are operating properly.
These devices must be in good working order for
safe vehicle operation.
9.
12.1
Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme
dirt and dust, or for severe fading from
exposure to sunlight, especially near the
buckle latch plate and in the D-loop guide
area.
12.2
Check operation of the buckle, latch, Komfort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if
equipped), web retractor, and upper seat
belt mount on the door pillar. Check all
visible components for wear or damage.
12.3
Check the seat belt and tether belt connection points and tighten any that are
loose.
Ensure the heater and defroster are operating
properly.
10. Check the operation of all interior lights.
10.1
Turn on the headlights and leave them on.
Ensure all equipped gauge bulbs illuminate in the dash message center.
10.2
Ensure all equipped driver control
switches illuminate.
10.3
Ensure both turn signal indicator bulbs
illuminate in the dash message center
when the turn signal switch is activated.
11. Check the operation of all exterior lights. See
Fig. 23.7.
11.1
Activate the high-beam headlights and
hazard warning lights.
11.2
Exit the cab and check that all exterior
lights and reflectors are clean and intact.
11.3
Check that the brake lights, taillights,
headlights, turn signals, marker lights,
identification lights, and clearance lights
are working properly.
12. Inspect the seat belts and tether belts.
WARNING
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be replaced before operating the vehicle. Do not attempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
making any modifications to the system, may result in personal injury or death.
23.7
WARNING
Never fill fuel tanks to more than 95 percent of
their liquid capacity. This could make them more
likely to rupture from impact, possibly causing
fire and resulting in serious personal injury or
death by burning.
Do not mix gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel.
This mixture could cause an explosion, possibly
resulting in serious personal injury or death. Do
not fill the fuel tanks in the presence of sparks,
open flames, or intense heat. These could ignite
the fuel, possibly causing severe burns.
IMPORTANT: On engines that comply with
EPA07 or newer regulations, use ultralow-sulfur
diesel (ULSD) with 15 ppm sulfur content or
less. Failure to use ULSD fuel may void the
warranty on emission components.
13. Check the fuel level in the fuel tank(s). To keep
condensation to a minimum, fuel tanks should be
filled at the end of each day.
14. Adjust the rearview and down view mirrors as
necessary.
15. Test the service brakes.
15.1
With the engine running and air system
fully charged, set the parking brake.
15.2
Put the vehicle in the lowest gear and
gently attempt to move it forward. The vehicle should not move.
If the vehicle moves, the parking brakes
are not operating correctly and must be
repaired before the vehicle is operated.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
1
2
1
3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
08/19/2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
f546089
Clearance Light
Identification Lights
Mirror Marker Light
Clearance Light
5. Side Marker Light
6. Front Turn Signal
7. Headlight, Low Beam
8. Combination Fog/Driving Light
9. Headlight, High Beam
10. LED Accent Light
Fig. 23.7, Exterior Lights
16. Test the backup alarm.
16.1
Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in reverse.
16.2
Move the vehicle slightly backward to ensure that the backup alarm is operating
correctly.
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections
and Maintenance
Engine Compartment Inspection
WARNING
Washer fluids may be flammable and poisonous.
Do not expose washer fluid to an open flame or
any burning material, such as a cigarette. Always
comply with the washer fluid manufacturer’s recommended safety precautions.
23.8
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
1.
3.2
Check the windshield washer reservoir fluid level.
The reservoir is usually located near the lefthand hood support. See Fig. 23.8.
1
Inspect the rain tray installed at the base
of the windshield. Ensure that the seal on
the forward edge of the rain tray is in
good condition.
4.
If the vehicle is equipped with an Allison automatic transmission, check the automatic transmission fluid level.
5.
Check for water in the fuel/water separator, if
equipped.
IMPORTANT: When draining fluid from a
fuel/water separator, drain the fluid into an
appropriate container and dispose of it properly. Many jurisdictions now issue fines for
draining fuel/water separators onto the
ground.
10/01/2014
5.1
f820468
1. Washer Fluid Filler Cap
NOTE: A hose may be used to direct water
into the container. Use a hose with a ½-inch
pipe thread on DAVCO models.
Fig. 23.8, Windshield Washer Reservoir
2.
After resetting the air intake restriction indicator
during the daily pretrip inspection, check the indicator again with the engine off.
2.1
2.3
3.
23.9
If air restriction exceeds the maximum allowable value, operate the vehicle for one
more day, making sure not to run the engine over rated rpm. Refer to the engine
operation manual for more information on
rated rpm for your engine.
If the engine is equipped with a built-in
water separator, loosen the drain valve,
and allow the water to run out. Close the
drain valve, taking care not to overtighten
it.
5.3
Alliance/Racor Models: Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise to open it. See
Fig. 23.9.
DAVCO Models: Remove the vent cap
and open the drain. See Fig. 23.10.
5.4
Inspect the vacuator valve(s). Make sure
the lips of each valve are undamaged and
pliable, free of debris, and remain closed
during inspection.
Stop draining fluid when fuel begins to
drain out.
Alliance/Racor Models: turn the drain plug
clockwise to close it.
If air restriction exceeds the maximum
value again, replace the air cleaner. For
instructions, refer to Group 09 of the
Western Star Workshop Manual.
Inspect water evacuation components.
3.1
5.2
For an indicator with graduations, check to
see if air restriction exceeds 18 inH2O.
For a go/no-go indicator without graduations, check to see if the colored bar
shows through the clear window.
2.2
Place a suitable container under the fuel/
water separator.
DAVCO Models: close the drain valve.
Install and hand-tighten the vent cap.
6.
Inspect the steering components.
6.1
Inspect tie rods, steering arms, and the
drag link for signs of looseness (i.e., shiny
spots or rust tracks). See Fig. 23.11.
6.2
Check the steering gear mounting bolts
and pitman arm pinch bolt and nut for
signs of looseness.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
6
5
10
4
3
7
9
2
8
8
7
1
9
10
6
11
02/03/2010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
5
f470552
Washers (qty 2)
Nuts (qty 2)
Frame Rail
Fuel Outlet Port
Fuel Inlet Port
Priming Pump
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Mounting Head
Mounting Bolts (qty 2)
Filter Element
Sight Bowl
Drain Plug
4
11
Fig. 23.9, Alliance Fuel/Water Separator Assembly and
Installation
6.3
6.4
3
12
Check the drag link nuts for missing cotter
pins.
2
Inspect the steering intermediate shaft and
end yokes for excessive looseness or
other damage.
NOTICE
Do not drive with a drive belt that is visibly worn
or damaged. If it fails, the lack of coolant flow
could rapidly cause damage to engine components.
7.
Inspect the serpentine drive belts for signs of
glazing, frayed edges, breaks, cracks, or oil contamination.
13
1
05/05/2009
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Inlet Port/Check Valve
Lower Housing
Bypass Valve
Filter Element
Spring
Cover O-Ring
Clear Cover
f470530
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Vent Cap O-Ring
Vent Cap
Collar
120VAC Pre-Heater
12VDC Pre-Heater
Drain Valve
Fig. 23.10, DAVCO Fuel/Water Separator (Fuel Pro 482
shown)
23.10
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
1
1
2
3.
Inspect air brake lines for dents, swelling, kinks,
twisting, abrasion, and damage, especially near
moving parts.
4.
Inspect flex air lines for deterioration or signs of
abrasion.
5.
Inspect for cracked, worn, or oil-contaminated
brake linings and brake drums (or rotors).
6.
Check the thickness of the brake linings. Replace brake linings on all brake assemblies on
the axle if any brake linings are worn to less than
approximately 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) at the thinnest
point.
1
3
Saddle Tank Areas Inspection
3
WARNING
10/11/2001
f461916
1. Steering Gear Mounting Bolts
2. Pitman Arm Pinch Bolt Nut
3. Drag Link Nut
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
sludge particles may be in the airstream and
could cause injury.
Fig. 23.11, Integral Steering Gear Fasteners
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections
and Maintenance
NOTICE
Walk around the vehicle and inspect brake system
components for visible damage.
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air
brake system, which could adversely affect braking.
1.
1.
Brake Component Inspection
Inspect all visible brake system components for
missing fasteners or signs of looseness, such as
rust tracks.
NOTICE
If the external breather tube or breather cap is
missing or incorrectly installed, road dirt and debris can adversely affect the operation of the
brake chamber. Once inside of the chamber, dirt
and debris can cause the internal parts of the
chamber to deteriorate faster.
2.
Inspect the exterior surfaces of brake chambers
for damage. Make sure that breather holes are
open and free of debris.
NOTE: Do not route air brake lines on top of
anything likely to be stepped on.
23.11
Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs
with automatic drain valves only).
NOTE: Battery locations vary between vehicles.
2.
Inspect the batteries.
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. To prevent possible personal injury, always wash your hands after handling battery parts and related accessories.
2.1
Remove the battery box cover and inspect
all visible battery cables for loose wiring or
damage.
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
2.2
Check that the battery hold-down is secure.
IMPORTANT: Aerodynamic components decrease drag force as a vehicle moves, thereby
improving fuel efficiency. If replacement of an
aerodynamic component is necessary, replacement components must meet or exceed the
drag reduction performance of the originally installed component in order to maintain compliance with greenhouse gas and full efficiency
regulations (GHG14).
3.
3.2
Make sure the radiator inlet and outlet
hoses are pliable and are not cracking or
ballooning.
3.3
Make sure the heater hoses are pliable
and are not cracking or ballooning.
3.4
Tighten hose clamps as necessary.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten hose
clamps, as hose life can be adversely affected.
3.5
Inspect the following aerodynamic components, if
equipped, for structural damage, cracks, or wear.
• Chassis fairings
• Roof fairing/deflector
• Side skirts
• Cab/sleeper extenders
• Battery access cover
Engine Compartment Inspection and
Adjustments
Ensure hose support brackets are securely fastened. Make sure hoses are not
located near sources of wear, abrasion, or
high heat.
IMPORTANT: When replacing hoses, install
service-type knitted or braided yarn-reinforced
neoprene hose. Extended-service-life silicone
hoses may also be used. See the Alliance Parts
Catalog at www.alliancebrandparts.com or
contact your Western Star Dealer.
4.
Check the steering wheel for excessive play.
4.1
IMPORTANT: If replacement of the hood or
bumper is necessary, the replacement component must meet or exceed the drag reduction
performance of the originally installed item in
order to maintain compliance with greenhouse
gas and full efficiency regulations (GHG14).
Start the engine. With the front tires
straight ahead, turn the steering wheel
until motion is observed at the front
wheels.
4.2
Align a reference mark on the steering
wheel to a rule, then slowly turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction until
motion is again detected at the wheels.
1.
Inspect the bumper and hood for structural damage, cracks, or wear.
4.3
2.
Check the hydraulic clutch reservoir, if equipped.
If necessary, add DOT 4 brake fluid.
3.
Inspect the radiator and heater hoses, including
the clamps and support brackets.
Measure the lash (free play) at the rim of
the steering wheel. Excessive lash exists
if steering wheel movement exceeds 2-1/2
inches (64 mm) with a 20-inch (508-mm)
steering wheel, or 2-1/4 inches (57 mm)
with an 18-inch (450-mm) steering wheel.
4.4
If there is excessive lash, check the steering system for wear or incorrect adjustment before operating the vehicle.
3.1
Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler
for damage and accumulated debris.
Straighten bent or damaged fins to permit
airflow across all areas of the cores.
NOTE: When traveling through areas of high
insect concentration, it may be necessary to
clean the exterior of the radiator or the
charge air cooler core as often as every 200
miles (320 km).
23.12
24
In An Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Filter Replacement, DAVCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Starting With Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1
24.1
24.1
24.1
24.2
24.5
24.6
In An Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights
hicle. A standard spin-on filter will correct this problem.
The hazard warning light switch (Fig. 24.1) is located
on the right-hand dash panel. To operate the hazard
lights, press the upper half of the switch. To cancel
the hazard warning lights, press the lower half of the
switch.
Refer to the DAVCO web site for additional information, www.davcotec.com.
WARNING
Fluid circulated through the fuel/water separator
to heat the fuel may be diesel fuel returned from
the engine, or engine coolant. Drain the fuel/
water separator only when the engine and fluids
have cooled. Draining it when the engine is hot
could cause severe personal injury due to scalding.
10/01/2014
f611275
Fig. 24.1, Hazard Warning Light Switch
Fire Extinguisher
An optional factory-installed fire extinguisher may be
located in the cab by the driver’s door, between the
seats, or in the sleeper baggage compartment, if
equipped.
Emergency Kit
An optional emergency reflector kit containing three
triangular reflectors may be supplied in the cab.
WARNING
Use extreme care when placing flares in emergency situations that involve exposure to flammable substances such as fuel. An explosion or
fire could occur causing serious personal injury.
If there is an emergency while driving, cautiously pull
off the road. Turn on the hazard warning lights. Place
the reflectors and flares along the side of the road to
alert other drivers that an emergency situation exists.
Emergency Filter
Replacement, DAVCO
If the filter cover on the DAVCO fuel/water separator
is broken, it will not be possible to operate the ve-
24.1
If returning fuel is released into the atmosphere,
its vapors can ignite in the presence of any ignition source. Do not expose the fuel to, or work
with the fuel system near, open flame or intense
heat. To do so could cause fire, possibly resulting in serious personal injury or property damage.
1.
Shut down the engine, apply the parking brake,
and chock the tires.
2.
Put a clean receptacle under the fuel/water separator and attach a piece of hose to the drain
valve, to direct fuel into the receptacle.
NOTE: The drain valve on the Fuel Pro 382 has
a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) opening; use a hose with
a 1/2-inch pipe thread to fit correctly.
3.
Remove the vent cap (Fig. 24.2, Item 9) and
open the drain valve (Fig. 24.2, Item 13) to drain
the fuel to just below the collar level, then close
the drain valve.
4.
Using a DAVCO collar wrench (Fig. 24.3), remove the clear cover and collar.
NOTE: Broken vent cap and collar warranty
claims will not be accepted if any tool other than
a DAVCO collar wrench, p/n 482017, is used for
removal. During installation, the vent cap and
collar are to be hand-tightened only, not tightened with a wrench.
5.
Remove the filter and dispose of it in an environmentally acceptable manner.
6.
Clean all threads and sealing surfaces very thoroughly. Even a small amount of dirt will prevent
VENT CAP
In An Emergency
10
FOR REMOVAL OF TOP COLLAR ONLY
9
8
02/16/2009
7
f470277
Fig. 24.3, DAVCO Collar Wrench
the fuel/water separator from sealing, and an air
leak will result.
6
5
7.
Ensure that the drain valve is closed.
8.
Remove the filter grommet from the filter stud, if
equipped.
9.
Fill the housing to the top with clean diesel fuel.
10. Install a standard fuel filter element on the filter
stud. If a standard filter element is not available,
install a spin-on fuel filter element (part number
FF105 or equivalent).
4
11. Install the cover O-ring, clear cover, and the col-
11
lar. Hand-tighten the collar.
3
12
12. Install and hand-tighten the vent cap O-ring and
vent cap.
13. Start the engine. When the lubricating oil
2
reaches its normal operating pressure, increase
engine speed to high idle for one to two minutes
to purge air from the system.
13
1
05/05/2009
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Inlet Port/Check Valve
Lower Housing
Bypass Valve
Filter Element
Spring
Cover O-Ring
Clear Cover
Emergency Starting With
Jumper Cables
f470530
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Vent Cap O-Ring
Vent Cap
Collar
120VAC Pre-Heater
12VDC Pre-Heater
Drain Valve
Fig. 24.2, DAVCO Fuel/Water Separator (Fuel Pro 482
shown)
When using jumper cables, follow the instructions
below.
WARNING
Batteries release explosive gas. Do not smoke
when working around batteries. Put out all flames
and remove all sources of sparks or intense heat
in the vicinity of the battery. Do not allow the vehicles to touch each other. Do not lean over the
batteries when making connections, and keep all
24.2
In An Emergency
other persons away from the batteries. Failure to
follow these precautions could lead to severe
personal injury as a result of an explosion or
acid burns.
POS JUMP
START STUD
3
NOTICE
2
NEG JUMP
START STUD
Make sure both electrical systems are the same
voltage. Electronic devices on both vehicles can
be damaged when connected to a vehicle with a
different operating voltage.
1.
Apply the parking brakes and turn off all lights
and other electrical devices. Ensure that the vehicles are not touching and both ignition switches
are turned to the OFF position.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to jump start a
damaged battery.
2.
Remove the battery box cover.
NOTE: The batteries on a Western Star vehicle
may be located in a variety of locations, including under the passenger seat, under the cab,
behind the cab, or under the sleeper bunk, if
equipped. Some vehicles may have two batteries in the step compartments on both sides of
the vehicle.
NOTICE
Always connect the batteries and jumper cables
correctly (positive-to-positive and negative-tonegative). Connecting a charging device backwards (positive-to-negative) can severely damage
the vehicle electrical content and cause nonwarrantable failures.
1
01/07/2011
f545726
1. Frame Rail
2. Negative Jump Start Post
3. Positive Jump Start Post
Fig. 24.4, Possible Jump Start Post Location
(passenger-side engine compartment)
WARNING
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
severe personal injury from explosion or acid
burns.
5.
Connect the negative (-) jumper cable to the
negative terminal or jump start post on the
booster battery.
6.
IMPORTANT: On vehicles equipped with optional jump start posts, connect to these posts
instead of the battery terminals. Jump start
posts may be installed in various locations on
the vehicle. See Fig. 24.4.
Connect the other end of the negative jumper
cable to the negative ground stud on the vehicle
requiring the jump start.
7.
Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump
start and let the engine run a few minutes to
charge the batteries of the other vehicle.
3.
Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the
positive terminal or jump start post on the discharged battery. See Fig. 24.5.
8.
4.
Connect the other end of the positive jumper
cable to the positive terminal or jump start post
on the booster battery providing the charge.
Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle receiving the jump. Do not operate the starter longer
than 30 seconds, and wait at least two minutes
between starting attempts to allow the starter to
cool.
9.
When the engine starts, let it idle a few minutes.
24.3
In An Emergency
4
D
B
3
E
2
+
−
−
+
+
−
−
+
−
+
C
−
+
1
A
01/07/2011
f545725
Disconnect jumper cables in the REVERSE order that they were connected.
A.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Discharged Battery
C. Positive Jumper Cable
E. Booster Battery
Negative Ground Stud
D. Negative Jumper Cable
1st Connection: Positive Jumper Cable to Discharged Battery
2nd Connection: Positive Jumper Cable to Booster Battery
3rd Connection: Negative Jumper Cable to Booster Battery
4th Connection: Negative Jumper Cable to Negative Ground Stud (discharged battery)
Fig. 24.5, Jumper Connections
WARNING
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
severe personal injury from explosion or acid
burns.
10. Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the
negative cable stud on the jump started vehicle.
11. Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the
booster battery.
12. Disconnect the positive cable from the booster
battery.
13. Disconnect the other end of the positive jumper
cable from the jump started vehicle.
24.4
In An Emergency
14. Install the battery box cover; be sure it is posi-
NOTICE
tioned properly before fastening the latch.
Towing
When it is necessary to tow the vehicle, make sure
the instructions below are closely followed to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
failure.
4.
WARNING
Do not tow an unbraked vehicle if the combined
weight of both vehicles is more than the sum of
the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) of the towing vehicle. Otherwise brake capacity will be inadequate, which could result in personal injury or
death.
Use protection to keep the chains from damaging
the frame.
5.
Disconnect the batteries at the negative terminals.
NOTICE
Failure to remove the axle shafts when towing
the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground
will result in damage to the transmission and
other drivetrain components.
2.
Remove the driveline from any drive axle that will
have its wheels touching the ground while the
vehicle is towed,
Do not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
from one tow hook to another to fasten for towing. Known as reeving, this practice is not permissible in most industrial applications of towing
and hoisting. Reeving can overload the hooks
and result in damage to the vehicle.
6.
3.
If the axle shafts were removed, cover the ends
of the hubs with metal plates or plywood cut to fit
the axle opening, and drilled to fit the axle shaft
studs. This prevents lubricant from leaking out
and will keep contaminants from getting into and
damaging the wheel bearings and axle lubricant.
If the driveline(s) were removed, ensure the
U-joint caps are secure so they will not come off.
7.
Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If
extra towing clearance is needed, remove the
front wheels.
8.
Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and signal lights. Connect any special towing lights required by local regulations.
WARNING
Failure to chock the tires or connect the tow
truck’s air brake system before releasing the
spring parking brakes could allow the disabled
vehicle to suddenly roll. This could cause property damage or personal injury.
9.
24.5
Attach the towing device.
NOTE: Due to the many variables that exist in
towing, positioning the lifting and towing device
is the sole responsibility of the towing-vehicle
operator.
or
remove the drive axle shafts on both sides of the
vehicle from any drive axle that will have its
wheels touching the ground while the vehicle is
towed.
Remove the bumper end caps and chrome bumper, if equipped.
NOTICE
Front Towing Hookup
1.
If a vehicle with tandem rear axles is to be lifted
and towed, chain the forward rear-axle assembly
to the vehicle frame. This will prevent the forward
rear-axle assembly from dropping and keep its
wheels off the ground while being towed.
Chock the tires on the disabled vehicle and connect the towing vehicle’s air brake system to the
vehicle being towed. Then, release the spring
parking brakes and remove the chocks.
In An Emergency
Rear Towing Hookup
NOTICE
Using a rear towing hookup on a vehicle
equipped with a roof fairing could cause damage
to the cab structure.
If reverse towing at speeds above 45 mph (70
kph) is necessary, hold down the cab with tension straps looped over the cab shocks and
under the frame rails. Failure to do so could
allow the wind load to lift the cab unexpectedly,
resulting in damage to the air springs and other
components.
1.
If the vehicle is equipped with cab air suspension, and reverse towing at speeds above 45
mph (70 kph) is necessary, hold down the cab as
follows:
1.1
Drain the air from the cab air springs.
1.2
Loop a 2-inch (5-cm) ratchet-style tension
strap (rated 2000 lb [900 kg] minimum
work load) over the top of the cab shock
and under the frame rail. Tighten the strap
for a snug fit. If the cab is equipped with
two or more shocks, restrain the aftmost
shock on each side of the vehicle.
2.
Place the front tires straight forward and secure
the steering wheel in this position.
3.
Disconnect the battery ground cables.
6.
Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If
extra clearance is needed, remove the bumper
extension if equipped.
7.
Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and signal lights. Also connect any special towing lights
required by local regulations.
Fire in the Cab
The incidence of fire in trucks is rare, according to
data from the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
#302 limits the flammability of specified materials
used inside the cab, but despite this, most materials
will burn. The cab of this vehicle contains urethane
foam, which is of concern in this respect.
WARNING
Urethane foam is flammable! Do not allow any
flames, sparks, or other heat sources such as
cigarettes or light bulbs to contact urethane
foam. Urethane foam in contact with such heat
sources could cause a serious, rapid fire, which
could result in death, severe burns, or gas poisoning, as well as damage to the vehicle.
In Case of a Cab Fire
As quickly as possible, bring the vehicle to a safe
stop, apply the parking brake, turn off the ignition,
and get out of the vehicle.
NOTICE
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
failure.
4.
On dual drive axles, using protection to keep the
chains from damaging the vehicle frame, chain
the forward-rear drive axle to the frame.
5.
Attach the towing device.
NOTE: Due to the many variables that exist in
towing, positioning the lifting and towing device
is the sole responsibility of the towing-vehicle
operator.
24.6
Index
Subject
Page
A
Accessory Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Espar Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Webasto Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
Adjustable Steering Column
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Adjusting Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Automatic Slack Adjusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3
Brake System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Brake System General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Brake System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2
B
Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3
2.4
2.4
9.2
9.1
C
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Cab Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Cigar Lighter/Accessory
Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Electronic Device Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Cab Climate Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Checking Headlight Aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Daily Pretrip Inspection
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Monthly Post-trip Inspection
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
Weekly Post-trip Inspection
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Climate Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
I-1
Subject
Page
Clutch Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7
Clutch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
Component GWR Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Cruise Control ("CC") Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Descent Control and
Deceleration Modes,
Detroit™ Automated
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
D
Daily Pretrip Inspections and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cab Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saddle Tank Areas
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and Slack
Adjuster Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel and Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dashboard and Instrument
Panel Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Air Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detroit™ Automated
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch Abuse Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detroit™ Multifunction
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eCoast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Overspeed Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Transmission Air
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Up and Shift into
Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selected Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suggested Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank,
EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEF Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEF Warnings and Engine
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.1
23.6
23.4
23.4
23.1
23.2
21.2
4.11
4.12
4.11
4.11
4.12
15.1
15.4
15.3
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.5
15.2
15.5
15.2
15.3
15.3
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.3
Index
Subject
Page
Fuel/DEF Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
Differential Lock, Drive Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Differential Lock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Single Drive Axles with
Traction Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Driver Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
ICU4Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
E
Eaton Fuller 10-Speed RangeShift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
General Information, Eaton
Fuller Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
Operation, Eaton Fuller
Range-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
Eaton Fuller 13-Speed and 18Speed Splitter and RangeShift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
General Information, Eaton
Fuller Splitter and RangeShift Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Operation, Eaton Fuller
Splitter and Range-Shift
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
Eaton® Fuller® Transmission
Operation Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Emergency Filter Replacement,
DAVCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Emergency Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Emergency Starting With
Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2
Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Aftertreatment System
Indicators Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Certified Clean Idle Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
EPA Noise Emission Control
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Vehicle Emission Control
Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
Engine Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
Engine Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
Engine Idle Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
California Engine Idle
Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Idle Shutdown Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Cold-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Engine Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Subject
Page
Safety and Environmental
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Protection—Warning
and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold-Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting After Extended
Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPA-Regulated Emissions
Aftertreatment Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATS Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPA07 Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2
11.1
10.3
10.1
10.1
10.1
5.7
12.1
12.3
12.1
12.1
12.3
12.2
F
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Coupling, Fontaine and
Holland Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Coupling, Jost Fifth Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.7
Air Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.9
Manual Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.7
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4
Air-Actuated Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5
Manual Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4
Fifth Wheels, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Air Suspension Height
Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6
In Case of a Cab Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2
G
Grab Handles and Access
Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the Driver’s Side . .
Entering the Passenger’s
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting the Driver’s Side . . .
Exiting the Passenger’s Side
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
I-2
Index
Subject
Page
Greenhouse Gas Emissions
and Fuel Consumption
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
H
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Holland Trailer Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Trailer Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Trailer Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Hood Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Closing the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Opening the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Air Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Electric Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
I
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Instrumentation Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Air Intake Restriction Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Application Air Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
Drive Axle Oil Temperature
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
Engine Oil Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Primary and Secondary Air
Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Suspension Air Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
Transmission Fluid
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Turbocharger Boost
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Interaxle Lock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Interaxle Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
Inverter/Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
I-3
Subject
Page
L
Lane Departure Warning
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Voltage Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4
4.2
4.2
4.4
9.2
M
Meritor WABCO® Antilock
Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5
ECAS Automatic Load
Transfer (ECAS only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5
Trailer ABS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.11
Brake Component Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.11
Engine Compartment
Inspection and
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.12
Saddle Tank Areas
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.11
O
OnGuard™ Collision Safety
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Collision Mitigation System
(CMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Error Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
OnGuard Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Overhead Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
P
Parked HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Parked-HVAC Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Periodic Inspections and
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Aftertreatment System
Regen Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Axle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Index
Subject
Page
Engine Brake Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Engine Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Hill Start Aid Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Power Takeoff Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Shutdown Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Transmission Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
R
Radio/Bluetooth Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Roll Stability System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Hard-Braking Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Roll Stability Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Roll Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Trip/Leg Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
S
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
Seat Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
Seats, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Sleeper Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Baggage Compartment
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Sleeper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Sleeper Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Sliding Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
Sleeper Climate Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Accessory Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Controls, Vehicles With ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Controls, Vehicles Without
ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Sleeper Compartment
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Bunk Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
Suspension/Trailer Connection
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Air Suspension Height
Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
ECAS Dash Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
ECAS Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Fifth Wheel Slide Control
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Trailer Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Subject
Page
Front Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5
Rear Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6
V
Vehicle Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Chewing Gum or Wax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Grease and Oil-Based Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Mildew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Sugar and Water-Based
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Ball Point Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Chewing Gum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3
Nail Polish and Nail Polish
Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Ordinary Dirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Shoe Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Sulfide Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2
W
Warning and Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Engine Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8
Engine Compartment
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8
Western Star High-Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Windows and Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Down-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Windshield Wiper and Washer
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
T
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5
I-4
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement